GIFT  OF 
J.B.    Peixotto 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/firstlatinwriterOOabborich 


fHorris  anti  JHorgan^g  ILatin  Series 

EDITED  FOR   USE  IM  SCHOOLS  AND   COLLEGES 
UNDER  THE   SUPERVISION   OF 

EDWARD   P.   MORRIS,   M.A., 

PROFESSOR  OF   LATIN  IN   YALE   UNIVERSITY 

AND 
MORRIS    H.   MORGAN,   PH.D., 

PROFESSOR  OF  CLASSICAL   PHILOLOGY   IN    HARVARD   UNIVERSITY 


VOLUMES    OF   THE    SERIES 

First  Year  Latin  for   English  Speaking  Beginners.     George 

H.  Browne,  Browne  and  Nichols  School,  Cambridge.  ^ 

A  School  Latin  Grammar.     Morris  H.  Morgan,  Harvard   University. 

;^i.oo. 

A  First  Latin  Writer.     M.  A.  Abbott,  Groton  School. 
Connected  Passages  for  Latin  Prose  Writing.      Maurice  W. 

Mather,    Harvard   University,    and    Arthur    L.    Wheeler,    Bryn    Mawr 

College,     ^i.oo. 

Caesar.     Episodes  from  the  Gallic  and  Civil  Wars.     Maurice 
W.  Mather,  Harvard  University. 

Cicero.     Select  Orations  with  Extracts  from  the  Epistles  to 

serve  as  Illustrations.    J.  Remsen  Bishop,  Walnut  Hills   High 

School,    Cincinnati,    and    Frederick    A.   King,    Hughes    High    School, 

Cincinnati. 
Selections  from   Latin   Prose   Authors   for   Sight   Reading. 

Susan  Braley  Franklin  and  Ella  Catherine  Greene,  Miss  Baldwin's  School, 

Bryn  Mawr.  60  cents. 
Cicero.      Cato  Maior.      Frank  G.  Moore,  Dartmouth  College. 
Cicero.      Laelius  de  Amicitia.      Clifton  Price,  University  of  California. 

75  cents. 
Selections  from  Livy.      Harry  E.  Burton,  Dartmouth  College. 
Horace.      Odes  and  Epodes.      Clifford  H.  Moore,  Harvard  University. 

^1.50. 

Terence.      Phormio  and  Adelphoe.      Edward  P.    Morris,  Yale  Uni- 
versity. 

Pliny's  Letters.      Albert  A.  Howard,  Harvard  University. 

Tibullus.      Kirby  F.  Smith,  Johns  Hopkins  University. 

Lucretius.      William  A.  Merrill,  University  of  California. 

Latin   Literature   of  the  Empire.      Alfred   Gudeman,    University  of 
Pennsylvania. 

Vol.      I.   Prose  :  Velleius  to  Boethius ^1.80 

Vol.   n.    Poetry:   Pseudo-Vergiliana  to  Claudianus      .      .      .      .      1.80 

Selections  from  the  Public  and  Private  Law  of  the  Romans. 
James  J.  Robinson,  Yale  University. 

Others  to  be  announced  later. 


A    FIRST    LATIN    WRITER 


BY 
MATHER   A.   ABBOTT 

•/ 

MASTER   IN   GROTON    SCHOOL 


o>a<o 


NEW  YORK  •:.  CINCINNATI   :•  CHICAGO 

AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


/  '< 


a  iiJULyiCJh^^ 


Copyright,  1904,  by 
EDWARD   P.   MORRIS  AND   MORRIS   H.   MORGAN. 

Entered  at  Stationers*  Hall,  London. 

Abbott's  first  latin  writer. 
W.  P.    I 


INTRODUCTION 

This  book  is  not  an  exhaustive  text-book  on  Latin  com- 
position. It  is  intended  for  the  use  of  beginners ;  that  is, 
for  those  who,  having  completed  the  study  of  some  first- 
year  Latin  book,  are  in  a  position  to  take  up  the  study  of 
the  manner  in  which  a  connected  passage  of  EngHsh  prose 
should  be  translated  into  Latin. 

In  this  book,  therefore,  the  fundamental  rules,  and  those 
only,  have  been  dealt  with;  exceptions,  unless  of  great 
importance,  have  been  disregarded;  phrases  and  con- 
structions of  infrequent  occurrence  have  been  omitted. 

The  reason  why  these  omissions  have  been  made  is  that 
the  writer  has  found  that  if  with  a  given  rule  too  many 
exceptions  have  been  included,  his  younger  pupils'  minds 
have  had  so  much  to  assimilate  that  a  general  confusion 
has  been  the  result.  The  fundamental  rule  has  become  so 
entangled  with  exceptions  that  it  has  often  been  lost  sight 
of  altogether. 

It  is  the  intention  of  this  book,  therefore,  to  set  forth 
in  a  simple  way,  which  can  be  easily  understood  by  the 
youngest  pupil,  those  rules  of  Latin  composition  which 
are  absolutely  necessary  to  the  grammatical  rendering  of 
English  into  Latin  prose. 

The  subject-matter  of  the  compositions  has  been  taken 
from  the  second  book  of  Caesar's  "Gallic  War."  The 
vocabularies  and  examples  have  been,  for  the  most  part, 
taken  from  that  book.     The  reason  for  this  selection  is 

5 

869060 


A  FIRST    LATIN   WRITER 

that  this  book  of  the  "Gallic  War  "  is  used  in  most  of  our 
schools  as  the  usual  text-book  for  the  beginning  of  second- 
year  Latin. 

The  book  has  been  divided  into  three  parts,  and  of  these 
parts  the  first  has  been  divided  into  thirteen  lessons,  the 
second  into  twelve,  and  the  third  into  twelve;  so  that  if 
one  lesson  is  taught  a  week,  the  first  part  will  correspond 
to  the  first  term  of  the  school  year,  the  second  to  the 
second  term,  and  the  third  to  the  third. 

As  this  book  is  intended  for  the  use  of  those  who  have 
completed  the  study  of  some  first-year  Latin  book,  the 
pupil  is  supposed  to  have  mastered  the  rules  of  Latin 
inflection  and  the  primary  rules  of  syntax,  i.e,  the  four 
concords  and  the  division  of  the  sentence  into  main  and 
subordinate  clauses.  But  as  some  further  practice  may  be 
required  in  these  rules  of  syntax,  an  appendix  has  been 
added,  in  which  these  laws  have  been  fully  dealt  with. 

The  writer  is  under  obligations  to  Dr.  E.  H.  Higley  of 
Groton  School,  who  has  kindly  read  the  manuscript  and 
has  made  many  important  suggestions.  Gratitude  is  also 
due  the  editors  of  this  series  for  criticism  and  assistance  in 
the  reading  of  the  proof-sheets. 

M.  A.  A. 

Groton,  Mass. 


CONTENTS 

PART    I 
LESSON   I 

PAGE 

Indirect  Discourse.     Main  Clause.     Present  Tense  .         .        .        .11 

LESSON   II 

Indirect  Discourse.     Main  Clause.     Perfect  Tense  ....       14 

Indirect  Discourse.     Subordinate  Clause .15 

Accusative  of  End  of  Motion 16 

LESSON   III 

Indirect  Discourse.     Future  Tense 19 

Accusative  of  Extent  of  Space  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .19 

Ablative  of  Place  and  Separation 20 

LESSON  IV 

Complementary  Infinitive 22 

Locative  Case.     Towns,  etc.,  in  Connection  with  End  of  Motion  and 

Separation 23 

LESSON   V 

Purpose  Clauses 26 

Sequence  of  Tenses         ..........  27 

Ablative  of  Time  When  and  Within  Which     ......  28 

Accusative  of  Duration  of  Time       ........  28 

LESSON   VI 

Relative  Clauses  of  Purpose 30 

Ablative  of  Means  and  Ablative  of  Agent 31 

LESSON  VII 

Purpose  Clauses  with  Gerund  and  Gerundive 33 

Ablative  of  Manner 33 

7 


CONTENTS 
LESSON   VIII 

PAGE 

Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose 35 

Verbs  of  Asking 38 

LESSON   IX 

Clauses  of  Result 40 

Ablative  of  Accompaniment 41 

LESSON   X 

Substantive  Clauses  of  Result 43 

Ablative  of  Cause 44 

LESSON   XI 

Remarks  on  Purpose  and  Result 46 

Genitive  and  Ablative  of  Description 46 

LESSON    XII 
Revievi^  of  First  Four  Lessons 48 

LESSON   XIII 
Revievi^  of  Last  Seven  Lessons ,         .50 

PART   II 

LESSON  XIV 
conditional  Sentences.     Present,  Past,  and  Future         •        •        •        •      53 

LESSON   XV 
Conditional  Sentences.     Contrary  to  Fact 56 

LESSON   XVI 

Conditional  Sentences.     Present,  Past,  and  Future  in  Indirect  Discourse       59 

LESSON   XVII 
Conditional  Sentences.     Contrary  to  Fact  in  Indirect  Discourse     .        .       62 

LESSON   XVIII 
Temporal  Clauses ,        ,      66 

8 


CONTENTS 
LESSON   XIX 

PAGE 

Causal  Clauses .         .         .       70 

Ablative  of  Comparison  and  Comparatives  with  Quam    .         .         .         .       71 

LESSON    XX 

Clauses  of  Concession      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .       74 

Ablative  of  Degree  of  Difference •         •       75 

LESSON    XXI 
Ablative  Absolute 77 

LESSON    XXII 

Clauses  of  Characteristic  .........       8i 

Ablative  of  Specification,  Ablative  after  Vtor,  etc.  .....       81 

LESSON   XXIII 
The  Accusative  and  Ablative  classified    . 84 

LESSON  XXIV 
Review  of  Lessons  XIV  to  XVII  inclusive 87 

LESSON   XXV 
Review  of  Lessons  XVIII  to  XXIII  inclusive 88 

PART    III 

LESSON  XXVI 
Independent  Subjunctives.     Hortatory.     Optative  ....       90 

LESSON   XXVII 
Imperative.     Commands  and  Prohibitions 93 

LESSON   XXVIII 
Direct  Questions.     Dative  of  Possession 96 

LESSON  XXIX 

Indirect  Questions 98 

Partitive  Genitive    .         ,         .         .         .         .         .         .         ,         ,         .99 

9 


CONTENTS 
LESSON   XXX 

PAGE 

Periphrastic  Conjugations        .         .         . loi 

Dative  of  Agent 102 

LESSON   XXXI 
Participles  and  Gerund 104 

LESSON   XXXII 
Some  uses  of  Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses 107 

LESSON   XXXIII 
Uses  of  the  Genitive 109 

LESSON     XXXIV 
Uses  of  the  Dative  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .112 

LESSON    XXXV 
Review  of  Lessons  XXVI  to  XXIX  inclusive 116 

LESSON   XXXVI 
Review  of  Lessons  XXX  to  XXXIV  inclusive  .         .         .         .         .     117 

LESSON    XXXVII 
Harvard  Examination.     Entrance,  1894  •         •         •         •         •         .119 

APPENDIX 

I.     Main  and  Subordinate  Clauses.     The  First  Concord       .         .         .119 

II.     The  Second  and  Third  Concords    .         .         .         .         .         ,         .123 

III.     The  Fourth  Concord.     Rules  of  Order  ......     126 

Vocabulary  . .        .        . ,       .     1 29 


10 


PART    I 

LESSON    I 

Indirect  Discourse  :    Main  Clause,  Present  Tense 

The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  in  the  nominative  case, 
but  in  what  case  is  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  ? 

1.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  put  in  the  accusative 
case.     Never  use  the  nominative. 

When  is  the  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative  construc- 
tion used  ? 

2.  The  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative  construction 
is  used  after  verbs  of  — 

(i)  saying- a.nd  tellings  dico,  nuntio,  certi5rem  facio,  etc. 

(2)  knowings  scio,  cognosco,  etc. 

(3)  thinking  and  hearings  puto,  existimS,  arbitror,  audio,  etc. 

(4)  perceivings  sentio,  comperio,  reperio,  vide5,  etc. 

3.  Therefore  the  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative  con- 
struction is  a  subordinate  clause  used  as  the  object  of 
verbs  of  saying,  teUing,  knowing,  thinking,  hearing,  and 
perceiving. 

Now,  because  after  such  verbs  the  words  of  the  writer 
or  speaker  are  not  given  exactly  as  he  said  them  {i.e.  direct 
discourse),  but  are  quoted  indirectly,  the  construction  after 
these  verbs  is  called  Indirect  Discourse ;  and,  as  we  have 

II 


§§  4-5]  A   FIRST   LAI  IN   WRITER 

seen  that  the  infinitive  with  subject  accusative  follows 
these  verbsj  .the;  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative  con- 
^£tfVK:tio|i'-is  iiJ^Hfor  the  main  clause  of  indirect  discourse. 

':  ':  -  l^idW^  ?.s  it  'deferhiined  which  tense  of  the  infinitive  to  use 
in  the  main  clause  of  indirect  discourse  ? 

4.  If  the  time  to  be  indicated  is  present,  or  if  repeated 
action  in  past  time  is  to  be  denoted  by  the  main  clause  of 
indirect  discourse,  the  present  tense  of  the  infinitive  must 
be  used.   ^ 

EXAMPLES 

T/ie  ambassado7^s  say  that  the  Belgians  are  under  arms, 

Legati  dicunt  Belgas  in  armis  esse. 

Introducing  verb  of  saying,  dicunt. 

Indirect  discourse,  that  the  Belgians  are  under  arms. 

Subject  accusative,  Belgas. 

Verb  infinitive,  esse. 

5.  The  word  that,  which  usually  follows  the  verb  of 
saying,  etc.,  in  English,  must  never  be  translated  into 
Latin. 

In  the  following  examples  point  out  the  introducing 
verb,  the  subject,  and  main  verb  of  indirect  discourse  : 

1.  All  these  announced  that  bands  of  men  were  being  col- 
lected, and  that  the  army  zvas  being  brought  together  into 
one  place. 

Hi  omnes  nuntiaverunt  maniis  cogi,  exercitum  in  unum 
locum  condiici. 

2.  He  heard  that  the  Bellovaci  were  the  most  powerful 
among  them. 

Audivit  plurimum  inter  eos  Bellovacos  valere. 

12 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  6-7 

3.  He  found  out  that  the  Suessiones  zvere  theirneighbors. 
Reperiebat  Suessiones  suos  esse  finitimos. 

4.  The  ambassadors  said  that  now  Galba  was  king. 
Legati  dicebant  nunc  esse  Galbam  regem. 

6.  VOCABULARY 

Note.  —  In  the  lesson  vocabularies  only  the  most  important  words 
are  given ;  for  the  words  used  in  the  compositions  which  are  not  found 
in  the  lesson  vocabularies,  reference  must  be  made  to  the  vocabulary  at 
the  end  of  the  book. 

VERBS  NOUNS,  ETC. 

Be  able,  can,  possum,  posse,  potui  Also,  etiam  (adv.). 

—  foil,    by   complementary    in-  y^r////,  exercitus, -us  (m.). 

finitive.  Deed,  factum,  -i  (n.). 

Alar?7i,    commoveo,  2,     commovi,  Concermng,  about,  de  (prep,  with 

commotus.  abl.).- 

Assert,  confirm©,  i .  Hand,  band  of?nen,  manus,  -us  (f.) . 

Drive    together,    collect,    cogo,    3,  Legion,  legio,  -onis  (f.). 

coegi,  coactus.  Neighbors,  finitimi,  -orum  (m.). 

Intend,  have  in  mind,  in   animo  One,  iinus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

habeo,  2.  Place,  locus,  -i  (m.),  plural  neuter. 

Knoui,  cognosce,  3,  cogn5vi,  cog-  Tribe,  gens,  gentis  (f.). 

nitus. 
Bring,  bri?tg  together,  condiico,  3, 

conduxi,  conductus. 
Say,  dico,  3,  dixi,  dictus. 
Set   out,   proficiscor,    3,   profectus 

sum. 

COMPOSITION 

7.  The  Senones  said  that  they  were  the  neighbors  ^  of 
the  Belgae,  that  therefore  they  ^  knew  about  the  deeds  of 
this  tribe  and  were  able  to  ^inform  Caesar  concerning  them. 
They  said  also  that  this  nation  was  collecting  bands  of  men 
and  was  bringing  its  army  *  into  one  place.  Caesar,  how- 
ever, asserts  that  he  is  not  alarmed  ^by  these  reports,  that 

13 


§§  8-IO]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

he  has  six  legions  with  him,  and  that  he  intends  to  set  out 
with  these  men  ^  for  the  territories  of  the  Belgae. 

NOTES,    PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  Of  the  Belgae^  dative  with  finitimos. 

2.  To  know  about ^  cognoscere  de,  followed  by  ablative. 

3.  To  inform^  certiorem  facere,  complementary  infinitive  after  posse.    25. 

4.  Into  one  place ^  in  iinum  locum.     In  with  accusative.     12. 

5.  ^/ //^^j^  r^/<?r/j,  ablative  of  means.     45. 

6.  For,  ad,  followed  by  accusative. 

LESSON    II 

Indirect  Discourse:  Main  Clause,  Perfect  Tense. 
Indirect  Discourse  :  Subordinate  Clause.  Accusa- 
tive OF  End  of  Motion 

8.  We  have  seen  that,  if  present  time  or  repeated  action 
in  past  time  is  to  be  denoted  by  the  main  clause  of  indirect 
discourse,  the  present  tense  of  the  infinitive  must  be  used ; 
but  \i  past  time  is  to  be  denoted,  the  perfect  infinitive  must 
be  used : 

They  say  that  Diviciactis  has  been  king. 

Or,  They  said  that  Diviciacus  had  been  king, 

Dicunt  (or)  Dixerunt  Diviciacum  fuisse  regem. 

9.  We  have  seen  that  the  accusative  and  infinitive  con- 
struction is  used  for  the  main  clause  of  indirect  discourse  ; 
but  if  there  is  a  subordinate  clause,  depending  on  this 
main  clause,  in  what  mood  will  the  verb  of  this  subordinate 
clause  be  .'* 

10.  The  verb  of  a  subordinate  clause  in  indirect  dis- 
course must  be  put  into  the  subjunctive  and  therefore,  of 
course,  its  subject  must  be  in  the  nominative  case  : 

14 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  ii 

They  said  that  DiviciactiSy  who  had  been  the  most  power- 
ful man  in  all  Gaid^  had  been  king, 

Dixerunt  Diviciacum,  qui  potentissimus  totius  Galliae  fu- 
isset,  regem  fuisse. 

How  is  it  known  which  tense  of  the  Subjunctive  to  use 
in  subordinate  clauses  of  indirect  discourse  ? 

II.  The  tense  of  the  subordinate  verb  in  indirect  dis- 
course is  determined  usually  by  reference  to  the  intro- 
ducing verb  of  saying,  etc. 

That  is  : 

If  the  introducing  verb  is  primary,  i.e.  present,  future, 
future  perfect,  or  perfect  subjunctive,  the  tense  of   the 

subordinate  verb  will  be  primary,  i.e.  — 

* 

Present  subjunctive  for  present  time, 
Perfect  subjunctive  for  past  time. 

but: 

If  the  introducing  verb  is  secondary,  i.e.  imperfect, 
perfect  indicative,  or  pluperfect,  then  the  tense  of  the 
subordinate  verb  will  be  secondary,  i.e.  — 

Imperfect  tense  subjunctive  for  present  or  repeated 
action. 

Pluperfect  tense  subjunctive  for  past  time. 

Exception  : 

But  if  the  verb  of  the  main  clause  of  indirect  dis- 
course is  in  the  perfect  infinitive,  then  the  introducing 
verb  is  usually  disregarded  and  the  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect subjunctive  is  used  for  the  verb  of  the  subordinate 
clause. 

IS 


12-13]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


EXAMPLES 


He  says  that  Caesar,  who  has  conquered  the   Gaids,  is 
cons7il. 


Dicit  Caesarem,  qui  Gallos  super averit,  consulem  esse. 

He  says  that  Caesar,  who  has  conquered  the  Gauls,  has 
been  consul. 


Dicit  Caesarem,  qui  Gallos  superavisset,  consulem  fuisse. 

He  said  that  Caesar,  who  zvas  conquering  the  Gauls,  was 
consul. 


Dixit  Caesarem,  qui  Gallos  superaret,  consulem  esse. 

He  said  that  Caesar,  who  zvas  conquering  the  Gauls,  would 
be  consul. 


Dixit  Caesarem,  qui  Gallos  superaret,  consulem  futiirum 
esse. 

12.  The  Place  to  Which  some  one  or  something  moves 
is  put  into  the  accusative  and  is  preceded  by  the  preposi- 
tion in,  into,  or  ad,  to  : 

The  army  has  been  brougJit  together  into  one  place. 
Exercitus  in  unum  locum  conductus  est. 

Note.  —  This  is  called  the  Accusative  of  End  of  Motion. 
EXAMPLES 

13.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  main  and 
subordinate  clauses  of  indirect  discourse,  and  account  for 
all  tenses  and  all  accusatives. 

16 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  I3 

1.  Diviciacus  says  that  the  Bellovaci  have  always  been 
under  the  protection  of  the  Haeduan  state, 

Diviciacus  dicit  Bellovacos  omni  tempore  in  fide  civitatis 
Haeduae  fuisse. 

2.  When  they  knew  that  the  hope  of  taking  the  town  had 
failed  them, 

Vbi  intellexerunt  spem  de  expugnando  oppido  se  fefellisse. 

3.  He  found  out  that  the  women  and  those  zvho  seemed 
useless  for  fighting  had  been  throzvn  together  into  a  place^ 
whither  on  account  of  szvamps  the  army  had  no  access. 

Reperiebat  mulieres  quique  ad  pugnam  inutiles  viderentur 
in  eum  locum  coniectos  esse,  quo  propter  paludes  exercitui 
aditus  non  esset. 

4.  He  says  that  those  who  had  been  the  leaders  of  this 
plan  have  fled  into  Britain, 

Dicit  eos  qui  eius  consili  principes  f uissent,  in  Britanniam 
profugisse. 

5.  He  said  that  he  would  do  that  which  he  had  done  in 
the  case  of  the  Nervii, 

Dixit  se  id  quod  in  Nerviis  fecisset  facturum  esse. 

6.  He  says  that  unless  help  is  sent  to  him,  he  is  not  able 
to  hold  out  longer. 

Dicit,  nisi  subsidium  sibi  submittatur,  sese  diutius  sus- 
tinere  non  posse. 


FIRST  LATIN  WRITER  —  2  I  / 


§§  14-15]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

14.     VOCABULARY 

VERBS  Use,  utor,  3,  usus   sum,  followed 
Conspire,  coniuro,  i.  by  ablative. 

Demand,  postulo,  i. 

Dwell,  incolo,  3,  incolui, .  nouns,  etc. 

Give,  do,  I,  dedi,  datus.  Against,  contra  (adv.). 

Joifi,   coniungo,  3,  coniunxi,   con-  Ainbassador,  legatus,  -i  (m.). 

iunctus.  Hostage,  obses,  obsidis  (c). 

Prepare,  par5,  i.  Magistracy,  magistratus,  -us  (m.). 

Ready,  prepared,  paratus,  -a,  -um  Relation,  consanguineus,  -i  (m.). 

(p.  p.  oiparo  used  as  adj.).  Rest  of,  remaining,  reliquus,  -a, 
Receive,  recipio,  3,  recepi,  receptus.  um  (adj.). 

Revolt,   deficio,  3,  defeci,  defectus.  To,  ad  (prep,  with  ace). 
Surrender,  hand  over,  permitto, 

3,  permisi,  permissus. 

COMPOSITION 

15.  The  Remi  sent  ambassadors  to  Caesar.  These  men 
told  him  that  the  Remi  surrendered  ^themselves  and ^ all 
their  possessions  to  him ;  that  they  had  not  conspired 
with  the  rest  of  the  Belgae,  who  had  revolted,  but  were 
ready  to  give  the  hostages,  which  he  had  demanded,  and 
to  receive  him  into  their  towns.  They  say,  also,  that  the 
Germans,  who  dwell  on  the  other  side  of  the  Rhine,  are 
^ under  arms,  and  have  joined  ^themselves  to  the  Belgae; 
that  the  Suessiones,  their  relations,  who  used  the  ^same 
laws  and  had  the  same  magistracy  ^  with  them,  have  also 
conspired  against  the  Roman  people. 

PHRASES,   NOTES,   ETC. 

1.  Themselves  and  all  their  possessions,  se  suaque  omnia. 

2.  To  be  tmder  arms,  in  armis  esse. 

3.  To  join  to,  conjungere  cum,  with  the  ablative. 

4.  Vtor  with  the  ablative.     See  156. 

5 .  With  them,  cum  ipsis. 

18 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  16-19 

LESSON     III 

Indirect  Discourse  :  Future  Tense.  Accusative  of 
Extent  of  Space.  Ablative  of  Place  where  and 
Place  from  which 

16.  We  have  seen  that,  in  the  main  clause  of  indirect 
discourse,  the  present  infinitive  is  used  for  present  time  or 
repeated  action  in  past  time,  and  the  perfect  for  past  time ; 
but  when  is  the  future  infinitive  used  ? 

17.  The  future  infinitive  must  be  used  in  the  main  clause 
of  indirect  discpurse,  when  future  time,  or  completed  action 
in  future  time,  is  to  be  indicated : 

Caesar  said  that  he  would presctue  them. 
Caesar  dixit  se  eos  conservaturum  esse. 

Caution.  —  Do  not  forget  in  using  the  future  participle  that  its 
ending  -iirus  must  agree  with  its  subject. 

18.  After  verbs  denoting  to  hope  or  promise  the  future 
infinitive  of  indirect  discourse  is  used : 

He  hopes  to  conquer  the  Gaitls, 
Sperat  se  Gallos  superaturum  esse. 

They  p7'omise  to  obey. 
Pollicentur  se  parituros  esse. 

19.  The  Extent  of  Space  is  denoted  by  the  accusative 
without  a  preposition : 

He  is  many  miles  away. 
Multa  milia  passuum  abest. 

19 


§§  20-22]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

20.  But  the  Place  Where  an  action  takes  place  is  put 
into  the  ablative  and  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  in,  in. 

Note.  — This  preposition  in  may  be  left  out  if  the  noun  of  place  is 
qualified  by  an  adjective  : 

Power  of  standing  on  the  wall^  in  miiro  consistendi  potestas. 
But,  To  surround  the  legions  on  the  open  flank,  aperto  latere  legiones 
circumvenire. 

And : 

21.  The  Place  From  Which  an  action  starts  is  denoted 
by  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  a  or  ab  or  ex : 

The  enemy  7'an  from  the  camp  to  the  river. 
Hostes  ad  flumen  ex  castris  cucurrerunt. 

They  ran  down  from  the  higher  position. 
Ex  loco  superiore  decucurrerunt. 

Note.  —  This  is  sometimes  called  the  ablative  of  separation. 
EXAMPLES 

22.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  main  and 
subordinate  clauses  of  indirect  discourse.  Account  for  all 
the  accusatives  and  ablatives. 

1.  They  say  that  they  will  neither  send  ambassadors  nor 
accept  any  condition  of  peace. 

Confirmant  sese  neque  legates  missuros,  neque  uUam  con- 
dicionem  pads  accepturos  esse. 

2.  He  says  that,  if  he  did  this,  he  would  increase  the 
influence  of  the  Haedui  amongst  all  the  Belgae. 

Dicit,  si  hoc  fecerit,  Haeduorum  auctoritatem  apud  omnis 
Belgas  se  amplificaturum. 

20 


A  FIRST  LATIN  WRITER  [§§  23-24 

3.  The  town  of  the  Remi  was  eight  miles  away  from  this 
camp. 

Ab  his  castris  oppidum  Remorum  aberat  milia  passuum 
octo. 

4.  He  found  out  from  captives  that  the  river  Sabis  was 
distant fvm  his  camp  ten  miles,  no  more. 

Inveniebat  ex  captivis  Sabim  flumen  a  castris  suis  non 
amplius  milia  passuum  decem  abesse. 

5.  On  the  river  was  a  bridge. 
In  flumine  pons  erat. 

23.     VOCABULARY 

Verbs  Hope,  spero,  i. 

Arise,  be  sprung  from,  orior,   4,  Lead  to,  bring,  ^^^\iz%  i. 

ortus  sum.  Promise,  poUiceor,  2,  pollicitus 
Come,  venio,  4,  veni,  ventus.  sum. 

Cross,    transeo,   transire,    transii, 

transitus.  nouns,  etc. 

Divide,  divido,  3,  divisi,  divisus.  Each,  uterque,  utraque,  utrumque. 

Enroll,  e7ilist,  levy,   conscribo,  3,  S7ipplies,forces,ZQi^\di^,-dir\\m.{{.). 

conscripsi,  conscriptus.  Territories,  fines,  -um  (c). 

Find  out,  reperio,  3,  repperi,  reper-  War,  bellum,  -i  (n.) . 

tus. 

COMPOSITION 

24.  The  Remi  said  that  they  would  tell  Caesar  ^all 
about  the  Belgae. 

Therefore  Caesar  found  out  that  the  Belgae  had  not 
always  been  in  Gaul,  but  that  they  were  descended  from 
those  Germans  who,  ^a  long  time  ago,  had  crossed  the 
Rhine  and  had  come  from  Germany  into  Gaul. 

He  found  out,  also,  that  the  Belgae  were  divided  into 
many  tribes,  who  lived  at  a  great  distance  from  each  other, 
but  that  ^each  of  these  tribes  would  bring  many  men  to 

21 


§§  25-26]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

this  war;  that  the  Nervii  had  promised  that  they  would 
bring  fifty  thousand  from  their  soldiers,  the  Morini  would 
send  twenty-five  thousand,  and  the  Aduatuci,  who  were 
many  miles  away,  would  enroll  twenty-nine  thousand  in 
their  territories ;  that  the  Belgae  hoped  to  bring  all  these 
forces  together  ^  within  twenty  days. 

NOTES,  PHRASES,  ETC. 

1.  All  about ^  omnia  de  followed  by  ablative. 

2.  A  longtime  ago,  antiquitus,  adverb. 

3.  Each  of  these  tribes,  each  tribe. 

4.  Within  twenty  days,  viginti  diebus. 


LESSON    IV 

Complementary  Infinitive.  Locative  Case.  End  of 
Motion  and  Separation  in  Connection  with  Names 
OF  Towns,  etc. 

What  is  meant  by  Complementary  Infinitive.'* 

25.  When  the  action  of  the  subject  is  not  complete  by 
the  use  of  one  verb,  another  verb  is  added  in  the  infinitive 
mood  to  complete  the  meaning  of  the  first : 

He  is  able  to  the  camp,  incomplete. 

He  is  able  to  go  to  the  camp,  complete. 

Ad  castra  ire  potest. 

Note.  —  The  present  tense  of  the  infinitive  is  usually  used  for  the 
Complementary  Infinitive. 

What  sort  of  verbs  require  a  Complementary  Infinitive } 

26.  The  verbs  of  most  frequent  occurrence  that  take  a 
Complementary  Infinitive  are  — 

22 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  27-29 

attempt^  try,  conor,  -ari,  -atus  sum. 

be  able,  possum,  posse,  potui. 

be  accustomed,  soleo  (2),  solitus  sum  (semi-deponent). 

begin,  coepi,  coepisse  (defective). 

contvme,  pergo  (3),  perrexi,  perrectus. 

dare,  audeo,  audere,  ausus  sum  (semi-deponent). 

hesitate,  dubito  (i),  cf.  dubito,  to  doubt  (Lesson  X). 

27.  Note. — The  infinitive  is  used  v^^ith  interest  and  other  imper- 
sonal phrases,  and  appears  to  be  complementary,  but  with  an  impersonal 
phrase  the  infinitive  is  subject : 

It  is  to  7ny  interest  to  do  this,  i.e.  to  do  this  is  my  interest,  interest 
mea  hoc  facere. 

Here  hoc  facere  is  subject  of  interest. 

Other  impersonals  which  take  infinitive  as  subject  are  — 

Libet,  //  pleases.  Oportet,  it  behooves. 

Licet,  //  is  allowed.  Opus  est,  there  is  need. 

Necesse  est,  //  is  necessary.  Placet,  //  pleases. 

Visum  est,  it  seemed  good. 

28.  Names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  domus,  and  rus, 
never  take  a  preposition  when  they  are  in  the  accusative 
of  End  of  Motion  or  ablative  of  Separation  : 

He  went  from  home  to  Rome.     Domo  Romam  iit. 

But :  — 

When  Place  Where  is  to  be  denoted  by  the  name  of  a 
town  or  small  island,  domus,  or  rus,  these  words  have  a 
case  of  their  own  w^hich  is  called  — 


THE    LOCATIVE    CASE 

29.  In  nouns  of  first  and  second  declension  the  locative 
has  the  same  form  as  the  genitive  in  the  singular,  and  the 
ablative  in  and  plural  as : 

23 


§  30]  A  FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

In  Romey  Romae.  ht  Athens^  Athenis.  At  hoine^  domi. 
At  Philippi,  Philippis. 

In  nouns  of  the  third  declension  it  has  the  same  form  as 
the  dative  or  the  ablative  in  both  singular  and  plural : 

In  the  country y  ruri  or  rure.     At  Cures,  Curibus. 

EXAMPLES 

30.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  comple- 
mentary and  subject  infinitives,  the  nouns  of  place  where, 
to  which,  and  from  which  : 

1.  He  said  that  he  was  not  able  to  hold  out  longer. 
Dixit  sese  diutius  sustinere  non  posse. 

2.  They  began  to  fortify  the  camp. 
Coeperunt  castra  munire. 

3.  They  dared  to  cross  a  very  broad  river,  to  climb  very 
high  banks,  a7id  to  enter  upon  an  unfavorable  position. 

Transire  latissimum  flumen,  ascendere  altissimas  ripas, 
subire  iniquissimum  locum  ausi  sunt. 

4.  He  came  out  of  the  country  to  his  home  in  Rome  and 
then  went  to  Philippi. 

Rure  domum  Romae  venit  et  tum  Philippos  profectus  est. 

5.  He  shows  Diviciacus  how  much  it  zvas  to  the  interest 
of  the  common  safety  for  the  bands  of  the  enemy  to  be  kept 
apart, 

Docet  Diviciacum  quanto  opere  communis  salutis  intersit 
manus  hostium  distineri. 

6.  It  seemed  good  to  him  to  do  this. 

Hoc  facere  ei  visum  erat.  • 

24 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  31-32 

31.     VOCABULARY 

VERBS  Reachy  advenio,  4,  adveni,  adven- 
Answer,  responded,   3,    respond!,  tus. 

responsum.  Seem  best,  videtur,  2,  visum  est. 

Become,  to  be  done,  iio,  fieri,  factus  Summon,  send  for,  arcesso,  3,  ar- 

sum.  cessivi,  arcessitus. 

Hear,  audio,  4. 
Keep  apart,  distineo,  2,  distinui,  nouns,  etc. 

distentus.  Camp,  castra,  -orum  (n.). 

Lead,  duco,  3.  Enemy,  hostes,  hostis  (c.)- 

Lay  waste,  vasto,  i.  Home,  house,  domus,  -us  (f.). 

Make  a  journey,  march,  iter  facio,  Space  of  three  days, \x\^i^x^xm.,'\{Jx.) . 

3,  feci,  factus. 

COMPOSITION 

32.  Caesar  summoned  Diviciacus.  But  this  man  was  at 
Bratuspantium  in  the  country.  However,  he  heard  that 
Caesar  had  sent  for  him,  and  therefore  it  seemed  best  to 
him  to  set  out  from  Bratuspantium  and  to  go  to  Caesar's 
camp.  He  did  not  dare  to  march  quickly  through  an 
enemy's  country,  but  nevertheless  was  able  to  reach  Cae- 
sar's camp  ^in  the  space  of  three  days.  Caesar,  ^on  his 
arrival,  told  him  that  it  was  of  interest  ^to  the  common 
safety  for  the  bands  of  the  enemy  to  be  kept  apart.  Divi- 
ciacus answered  that  he  was  able  to  keep  them  apart ;  that 
he  would  lead  his  forces  into  the  territories  of  the  Bello- 
vaci,  and  would  thus  be  able  to  lay  waste  their  land.  It 
pleased  Caesar,  therefore,  to  *  make  him  liberal  promises 
and  to  send  him  to  his  home. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC 

1.  Ablative  of  time  within  which.    See  37. 

2.  Adventii  eius,  ablative  of  time  when :  37. 

3.  Interest  is  followed  by  the  genitive,  but  instead  of  the  genitive  of 
a  personal  pronoun  the  ablative  feminine  singular  of  the  corresponding 
possessive  pronoun  must  be  used  : 

25 


§§  33-34]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

It  is  to  Caesuras  interest.     Interest  Caesaris, 
but: 

//  is  to  my  interest.     Interest  mea. 

4.   To  make  liberal  promises.    Liberaliter  poUiceri. 

Note.  —  Review  Lesson  XII  may  be  studied  here. 

LESSON    V 

Purpose    Clauses    with    vt    and    ne.      Sequence    of 
Tenses.    Ablative   of   Time 

What  is  a  purpose  clause.'^ 

33.  A  purpose  clause  is  a  subordinate  clause  which  shows 
the  design  or  purpose  of  the  clause  on  which  it  depends : 

Our  men  were  ready  under  arms  to  attack  them. 
Nostri  ut  eos  adgrederentur,  parati  in  armis  erant. 

How  is  a  purpose  clause  expressed  in  Latin } 

34.  There  are  several  ways^  of  expressing  purpose  in 
Latin,  but  by  far  the  most  usual  is  by  the  use  of  ut  (mean- 
ing that,  in  order  that)  or  negative  ne  (meaning  lest,  m 
order  that  not  or  that  not)  and  the  subjunctive  mood  : 

He  went  into  the  Province  in  order  that  he  might  levy 
troops. 

In  Provinciam  iit  ut  copias  conscriberet. 

He  destroyed  the  bridge  in  order  that  the  enemy  might  not 
cross. 

Pontem  interscidit  ne  hostes  transirent. 

Note.  —  English  frequently  makes  use  of  the  infinitive  to  denote 
purpose ;  for  instance,  in  the  first  of  these  sentences,  the  English 
rendering  would  be.  He  went  into  the  Province  to  levy  troops. 

26 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  35-36 

This  to  levy  means  ^  in  order  that  he  might  levy.'     Great  care  must 
therefore  be  taken  in  translating  an  English  infinitive  into  Latin. 


What  tense  of  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  a  purpose 
clause  } 

35.  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  which  must  be  used  in 
a  purpose  clause  depends  upon  the  rules  for  Sequence  of 
Tenses,  which  rules  apply  to  all  dependent  subjunctive 
clauses  and  are  as  follows : 

SEQUENCE    OF    TENSES 

Primary  tenses  of  the  indicative  are  followed  by  primary  tenses  of 
the  subjunctive. 

Secondary  tenses  of  the  indicative  are  followed  by  secondary  tenses 
of  the  subjunctive. 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

(present   time   or 


Present  1  f  Present 

Future  \  Primary  are  followed  by 

Future  perfect  J 


repeated  action  in 
.  past  time). 
Perfect  (past  time). 


D  \r  4        I  c         A  r  n       j  u     f  ^^^perfect  (repeated  action). 

Perfect        h  Secondary  are  followed  by  ^   z^r   z     /-  ^;  1  .    x- 

Pluperfect  J  ^  Pluperfect  (complete  time). 


What  is  the  effect  of  indirect  discourse  upon  a  purpose 
clause  .-^ 

36.  A  purpose  clause,  being  a  subordinate  clause  in  the 
subjunctive,  suffers  no  change  in  indirect  discourse,  unless 
the  tense  is  affected  by  the  sequence  taken  from  the 
introducing  verb.     Cf .  1 1 . 

He  said  that  he  would  go  to  the  Province  to  levy  troops. 

Dixit  se  ad  Provinciam  iturum  esse  ut  copias  conscriberet. 

27 


§§  37-39]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

37.  The  noun  which  denotes  the  Time  When  or  Within 
Which  an  action  takes  place  is  put  into  the  ablative: 

He  came  to  the  camp  at  night.    Nocte  ad  castra  iit. 
He  reached  the  camp  within  twenty  days.      Ad  castra 
viginti  diebus  advenit. 

But : 

38.  Duration  of  Time  is  expressed  by  the  accusative  : 
They  fought  for  four  days,     Quattuor  dies  pugnabant. 

EXAMPLES 

39.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  purpose 
clause,  give  reason  for  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive  in  each 
sentence,  and  account  for  all  accusatives  and  ablatives. 

1 .  He  destroys  the  bridge  that  the  enemy  may  not  cross. 
Pontem  interscindit  ne  hostes  transeant. 

2.  He  said  that  he  destroyed  the  bridge  that  the  enemy 
might  not  cross. 

Dixit  se,  ne  hostes  transirent,  pontem  interscidisse. 

3.  The  horsemen,  moreover,  to  wipe  out  the  disgrace  of 
their  flight,  fought  most  bravely, 

Equites  vero,  ut  turpitudinem  fugae  delerent,  fortissime 
pugnabant. 

4.  They  tried  to  cross  the  river  that  they  might  capture 
the  fortress  and  destroy  the  biHdge. 

Fltimen  transire  conati  sunt  ut  castellum  expugnarent 
pontemque  interscinderent. 

5.  On  his  arrival  they  fled.     Adventu  eius  fugerunt. 

28 


A  FIRST   LATIN  WRITER  [§§40-41 

6.  They  fought  for  a  whole  day.    Totum  diem  pugnabant. 

7.  They  ivere  harassed  for  many  years. 
Multos  annos  exagitati  sunt. 

40.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Attack^  oppugno,  i    (of  a  town)  ;  Day^  dies,  diei  (m.). 

adgredior,     adgredi,     adgressus  Firsts  primus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

sum.  Help^  auxilium,  -i  (n.). 

Capture^  take  by  storni^  expugno,  i.  Middle  of,  medius,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Hold  out,  withstand,  sustineo,  2,  Near,  ad,  with  ace. 

sustinui,  sustentus.  Night,  nox,  noctis  (f.). 

Obtain,  pario,  3,  peperi,  partus.  Townsman,  oppidanus,  -i  (c). 
Pitch  camp,  castra  pono,  3,  posui, 

positus. 

COMPOSITION 

41.  The  Belgae,  in  order  ^  that  they  might  capture  Bi- 
brax,  pitched  camp  near  this  town  and  attacked  it  ^with 
great  fury. 

The  townsmen,  however,  fought  most  bravely  in  order 
^  that  the  town  might  not  be  taken  by  storm  ;  and  held  out 
for  the  first  day.  But  in  the  night  Iccius,  their  general, 
sent  a  messenger  to  Caesar.  On  his  arrival  the  messenger 
says  to  Caesar  ^  that  he  has  come  to  obtain  help.  Caesar 
replies  ^  that  he  will  send  help  in  the  middle  of  the  night 
in  order  ^  that  Bibrax  may  not  be  captured ;  but  ^  that 
he  shall  demand  six  hundred  hostages  in  order  ^  that  Iccius 
may  not  conspire  against  him. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1 .  Caution.  —  The  that  of  English  indirect  discourse  is  never  ex- 
pressed in  Latin,  the  that  of  purpose  is  always  expressed.  Beware  of 
these  thats. 

2.  With  great  fury  ^  magno  impetu,  ablative  of  manner.     52. 

29 


§§  42-44]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

LESSON   VI 

Relative  Clauses  of  Purpose.     Ablative  of  Means. 
Ablative  of  Agent 

What  is  a  relative  clause  of  purpose  ? 

42.  A  relative  clause  of  purpose  is  a  purpose  clause 
which  is  introduced  by  the  relative  pronoun  qui,  quae, 
quod,  who,  which,  what,  or  by  the  relative  adverb  quo. 
These  relatives  take  the  place  of  ut : 

He  sent  soldiers  to  destroy  the  bridge. 
Milites,  qui  pontem  interscinderent,  misit. 

43.  The  relative  adverb  quo  is  used  only  when  there  is 
a  comparative  in  the  purpose  clause : 

They  made  a  hedge  in  07'der  that  they  might  the  more 
easily  hinder  the  cavalry  of  their  neighbors. 

Saepem  fecerunt  quo  facilius  finitimorum  equitatum  im- 
pedirent. 

How  is  it  known  when  to  use  qui  and  when  to  use  ut? 

44.  Qui  is  of  infrequent  occurrence  and  ut  is  never 
grammatically  wrong.     But  a  good  rule  is  : 

Use  qui  instead  of  ut  when  the  object  of  the  main  clause 
is  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  subject  of  the  purpose 
clause : 

He  sent  ambassadors  to  say,  etc. 

Legatos  misit  qui  dicerent,  etc. 

Note.  —  This  rule  is  not  true  of  substantive  clauses  of  purpose,  see 
Lesson  VIII. 

30 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  45-47 

45.  The  ablative  is  used  without  a  preposition  to  denote 
the  Means  or  Instrument  of  an  action : 

They  killed  a  great  number  of  them  with  their  swords, 
Gladiis  magnam  partem  eorum  interfecerunt. 

46.  The  ablative  with  the  preposition  a  or  ab  {b)>)  is 
used  with  a  passive  verb  to  denote  the  Agent. 

They  said  that  the  Haediii  had  been  reduced  to  slavery 
by  Caesar. 
Dixerunt  Haeduos  a  Caesare  in  servitutem  redactos  esse. 

Note.  —  The  Agent  is  a  person  and  requires  a  or  ab.  Means  is  a 
thing  and  requires  no  preposition. 

EXAMPLES 

47.  Point  out  the  clauses  of  purpose  and  give  reasons 
for  all  the  ablatives  and  tenses  of  the  subjunctives  in  the 
following  sentences : 

1.  The  Reini  send  ambassadors  to  hijn  to  say,  etc. 
Remi  ad  eum  legates  mittunt  qui  dicant,  etc. 

2.  At  the  beginning  of  summer  he  sent  Quintus  Pedius 
to  lead  these  legions  into  inner  Gaul, 

Inita  aestate,  in  interiorem  Galliam  qui  has  legiones  dedu- 
ceret,  Quintum  Pedium  misit. 

3.  He  ordered  them  to  open  up  their  maniples,  in  order 
that  they  might  the  more  easily  use  their  swords, 

Manipulos  laxare  iussit,  quo  facilius  gladiis  uti  possent. 

4.  These  men  were  harassed  by  their  neighbors  for 
many  years. 

Hi  multos  annos  a  finitimis  exagitati  sunt. 

5.  A  town  excellently  fortified  by  nature, 
Oppidum  egregie  natura  munitum. 

31 


§§  48-49]  A   FIRST   LATIN  WRITER 

48.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,  ETC. 

Bear^  brings  f ero,  f erre,  tuli,  latus.      A  little  while,  paulisper  (adv.) . 
Defend,  def endo,  3,  defend!,  defen-      Ambassador,    envoy,     legatus,    -i 

sus.  *  (m-)' 

Delay,  msiXQi,\,  ^r^7^^/K,  fortiter  (adv.). 

Destroy,  deleo,  2,  delevi,  deletus.         Bowman,  Sagittarius,  -i  (m.). 

Fire,  ignis,  -is  (m.). 

/?^^;2/Y7r^^;;/^;//,  subsidium, -i  (n.). 

Slinger,  funditor,  funditoris  (m.). 

Sword^  gladius,  -i  (m.). 


COMPOSITION 

49.  Ambassadors  were  sent  by  Icciiis  to  say  that  he 
was  not  able  to  hold  out  ^  any  longer.  Caesar  therefore  in 
the  middle  of  the  night  sent  the  bowman  and  slingers  to 
bring  help  to  Bibrax,  in  order  that  by  their  aid  the  towns- 
men might  the  more  easily  defend  themselves.  On  the 
arrival  of  these  reenforcements  the  townsmen  fought 
bravely  to  defend  the  town.  Therefore  the  enemy  ^  hav- 
ing delayed  a  little  while  ^  with  the  purpose  of  destroying 
the  villages  and  laying  waste  the  fields  of  the  Remi  by 
fire  and  sword,  marched  toward  Caesar's  camp;  and,  in 
order  that  they  might  come  there  the  more  quickly,  they 
marched  day  and  night.  Caesar  sent  scouts  to  find  out 
where  the  enemy  ^  had  pitched  camp,  and  these  men  re- 
ported that  the  camp  of  the  Belgae  was  only  two  miles 
away. 

PHRASES,   NOTES,  ETC. 

1.  Any  longer,  \(m.%Y^'&, 

2.  Having  delayed,  morati. 

3.  With  the  p2ir pose  of,  eo  consilio  ut,  with  subjunctive. 

4.  Had  pitched,  posuissent,  subjunctive  of  indirect  question,  see  190. 

32: 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  50-52 

LESSON   VII 

Purpose  with  Gerund  or   Gerundive.      Ablative   of 

Manner 

When  is  the  gerund  or  gerundive  used  to  denote 
purpose  ? 

50.  In  short  phrases  the  accusative  of  the  gerund 
^r  gerundive  with  ad,  or  the  genitive  of  the  gerund  or 
gerundive  with  causa  or  gratia,  may  be  used  to  denote 
purpose : 

For  the  picrpose  of  seeking  supplies, 
Commeatus  petendi  causa. 
For  the  purpose  of  encouraging  the  soldiers. 
Ad  cohortandos  milites. 

When  is  the  gerund  and  when  is  the  gerundive  used  ? 

51.  The  gerund,  being  a  noun,  is  usually  used  alone : 
Hiemandi  causa,  for  tJie  purpose  of  ivintering. 

But  the  gerundive,  being  an  adjective,  must  agree  with 
•some  noun  : 

Ad  cohortandos  milites. 

52.  The  ablative  is  used  with  the  preposition  cum  to 
denote  the  manner  of  an  action,  but  cum  may  be  omitted 
if  there  is  a  limiting  adjective  : 

Venit  cum  celeritate.     He  came  with  speed. 
But: 
Magna  celeritate  or  magna  cum  celeritate  venit. 

He  came  with  great  speed. 

Note.  —  Review  sequence  of  tenses,  35. 

FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  —  3  33 


§§  53-54]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

EXAMPLES 

53.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  ablatives  of 
manner  and  the  purpose  clauses,  showing  where  the  gerund 
and  where  the  gerundive  is  used  : 

1.  And  he  set  out  for  another  par^t  in  order  to  pass  the 
winter. 

Atque  in  alteram  partem  hiemandi  causa  profectus  est. 

2.  Time  was  wanting  not  only  for  fitting  on  decorations, 
but  also  for  putting  07i  their  hebnets  a7zd  for  taking  the 
coverings  off  their  shields, 

Non  modo  ad  insignia  accommodanda,  sed  etiam  ad  galeas 
induendas  scutisque  tegimenta  detrahenda,  tempus  defuit. 

3.  They  ran  down  to  the  river  with  marvellous  speed. 
Incredibili  celeritate  ad  flumen  decucurrerunt. 

4.  They  fougJit  daringly.     Cum  audacia  pugnabant. 

54.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS 

^^^/;z /^«///^,  proelium  committo,  3,      Battle^   pugna,  -ae  (f.),  proelium, 

commisi,  commissus.  -i  (n.). 

Draw    7ipj    instruo,     3,    instruxi,       Care,  cura,  -ae  (f.). 

instructus.  Cavalry,  equester,  equestris,  eques- 

Encourage,  hortor,  i.  tre  (adj.). 

Fight,  pugno,  i.  Hill,  coUis,  -is  (m.). 

Lead  out,  educo,  3,  eduxi,  eductus.      Line  of  battle,  acies,  aciei  (f.). 
Make  trial  of,  periclitor,  i .  Several,  nonnuUi,  -ae,  -a  (adj . ) . 

Terrify,  terreo,  2.  Speed,  swiftness,  celeritas,  celeri- 

tatis  (f.). 
Top  of,  summus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Valor,     courage,      virtus,     virtii- 
tis(f.). 

34 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  55-56 

COMPOSITION 

55.  Caesar,  in  order  that  he  might  make  trial  of  the 
courage  of  our  soldiers  and  the  valor  of  the  enemy,  fought 
several  cavalry  battles.  Then  ^  having  delayed  a  little 
while  in  camp,  in  order  to  encourage  the  soldiers,  he  drew 
up  his  line  of  battle  with  great  care  on  the  top  of  the  hill. 
He  left  two  legions  to  guard  the  camp  and  marched  out 
with  the  other  legions  '^  with  the  purpose  of  terrifying  the 
enemy.  The  enemy  saw  that  he  had  led  out  his  army  and 
they,  with  the  greatest  swiftness,  led  out  their  own  forces 
2  with  the  purpose  of  beginning  battle.  Caesar,  however, 
waited  for  their  attack  and  did  not  move  from  his  position. 

PHRASES,   NOTES,   ETC. 

1.  Having  delayed,  moratus. 

2.  Purpose  of,  ad  with  gerundive. 

LESSON    VIII 

SuBSTAxNTIVE    CLAUSES    OF    PURPOSE 

What  is  a  substantive  clause } 

56.  A  substantive  clause  is  a  clause  which  takes  the 
place  of  a  noun  and  is  either  the  subject  or  object  of  a 
verb.     Thus : 

{a)  He  asks  for  reenforcements. 

Here  reenforcements  is  object;  but: 

(b)  He  asks  that  remforcements  be  sent  to  him. 

Here  that  reenforcements  be  sent  to  him  takes  the  place 
of  reenforcements  in  sentence  {a)  and  is  the  object  of  the 
verb  asks, 

Rogat  ut  subsidia  sibi  mittantur. 

35 


§§  57-6i]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

57.  A  substantive  clause  of  purpose,  therefore,  is  a 
clause  of  purpose  which  takes  the  place  of  the  object  or 
subject  of  a  verb. 

What  sort  of  verbs  take  a  substantive  clause  of  purpose? 

58.  We  will  divide  the  verbs  that  take  a  substantive 
clause  of  purpose  into  three  classes. 

59.  First  class. 

(i)  Verbs  of  asking,  peto,  quaero,  rogo,  postulo,  and 
others. 

(2)  Verbs  of  commanding,  impero,  cogo,  decerno,  mando, 
negotium  do,  and  others. 

(3)  Verbs  of  advising  diXid  persuading,  persuadeo,  moneo, 
hortor,  etc. 

(4)  Verbs  of  permitting,  sino,  patior  (these  also  take 
the  infinitive). 


He  asks 
He  advises 
He  commands 
He  permits 


Rogat 

Monet 
me  to  go. 

^  Imperat 

Sinit 


me  ut  earn. 


Note.  —  When  the  introducing  verb  is  active,  the  substantive  clause 
is  object.  When  the  introducing  verb  is  passive,  the  substantive  clause 
is  subject. 

He  advised  me  to  go,  Monuit  ut  irem  ;  but  //  was  advised  that  I  should 
go,  Vt  irem  monitum  est. 

60.  Caution. — lubeo,  to  command,  and  veto,  to  forbid, 
though  verbs  of  commanding,  always  take  the  infinitive. 

61.  Second  class. 

Verbs  oi  fearing,  timeo,  metuo,  and  vereor. 

36 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRTfER  [§§  62-63 

With  these  verbs  ftote  the  peculiarity : 

I  fear  that  he  will  not  come.     Vereor  ut  veniat. 

Here,  where  we  should  expect  ne,  we  have  ut. 

And: 

I  fear  that  he  will  come.     Vereor  ne  veniat. 

Here,  where  we  should  expect  ut,  we  have  ne.  There- 
fore, after  a  verb  of  fearing,  use  ut  for  negative,  but  ne 
for  affirmative. 

62.  Third  class.     Cf.  77. 

Verbs  of  hindering  and  preventing,  deterreo,  2,  impedio, 
4,  prohibeo,  2. 

These  verbs  are  followed  by  ne  instead  of  ut. 

He  hindered  the  me7i  from  disembarking. 

Deterruit  | 

Impedivit  [  viros  ne  egrederentur. 

Prohibuit  ] 

Note. — Prohibeo,  the  verb  of  most  frequent  occurrence,  and  impe- 
dio, take  also  the  accusative  and  infinitive. 

Impedivit  1     ,  . 

T.  ^.M.    i.  h  viros  egredi. 

Prohibuit  J  ^ 

EXAMPLES 

63.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  substantive 
clauses  of  purpose,  and  show  to  which  class  the  purpose 
clause  belongs: 

I .    The  Bellovaci  ask  him  to  show  his  nsual  clemency, 
Bellovaci  petant  ut  sua  dementia  utatur. 

37 


§64]  A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 

2.  He  orders  the  Senones  to  find  out  these  things, 
Dat  negotium  Senonibus  ut  haec  cognoscant. 

But : 

3.  He  orders  Labienus  to  follow. 
Labienum  subsequi  iubet. 

4.  He  advised  tJie  tribunes  of  the  soldiers  to  charge  the 
enemy. 

Tribunos  militum  monuit  ut  signa  in  hostes  inferrent. 

5.  They  feared  that  our  army  would  be  led  to  them. 
Veriti  sunt  ne  ad  eos  exercitus  noster  adduceretur. 

6.  They  feared  that  Caesar  would  not  come. 
Veriti  sunt  ut  Caesar  veniret. 

7.  They  prevented  the  Remi  from  crossing  the  river. 
Prohibuerunt  Remos  flumen  transire. 

8.  They  hindered  the  Rcmi  from  crossing  the  river. 
Impediverunt  Remos  ne  flumen  transirent. 


64.     VOCABULARY 

To  ask : 

Rogo,  I,  is  followed  by  two  accusatives. 
He  asks  me  for  a  book.     Rogat  me  librum. 

Pet5,  3,  petivi,  petitus,  and  postulo,  \^to  demand^  are  followed  by 
the  accusative  of  the  thing  and  the  ablative  of  the  person  with 
a  or  ab. 

He  asks  me  for  a  book.     Petit  (or  postulat)  librum  a  me. 

Quaero,  3,  quaesivi,  quaesitus,  is  followed  by  the  accusative  of 

the  thing  and  the  ablative  of  the  person  with  a  or  de  or  ex. 
He  asks  me  for  a  book.     Quaerit  librum  a  (or  de  or  ex)  me. 

38 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  65 

y^jj^gg  Persuade^  persuadeo,  2,  persuasi, 

persuasus,      with       substantive 

Advise^  moneo,  2,  with  substantive  clause    of   purpose   and    dative 

clause  of  purpose.  of  person. 

Be  in  co?n?Hand,  have  charge  of,  Prevent,  hinder,  impedio,  4,  with 

praesum,  with  dative.  purpose  clause  and  ne. 

Cross,    transeo,    transire,   transii,  Prevent,  keep  from,  prohibeO;  2, 

transitus.  with  infinitive. 

Fear,  be  afraid  of,  vereor,  2,  veri-  Return,  redeo,  redire,  redii,  reditus. 

tus  sum.  Run  down,  decurro,  3,  decucurri,  de- 

Lead  back,  reduce,  3,  reduxi,  reduc-  cursus. 

tus.  See,  video,  2,  vidi,  visus. 
Order,  impero,  i,  with  substantive 

clause  of  purpose  and  dative  of  nouns,  etc. 

person.  Ford,  vadum,  -i  (n.). 

Order,  iubeo,  2,  iussi,  iussus,  with  Fort,  castellum,  -i  (n.). 

infinitive  and  accusative  of  per-  Struggle,  pugna,  -ae  (f.). 

son.  6''Z£/^;//^,  palus,  paludis  (f.). 

Pertnit,  sino,  3,  sivi,  situs.  Without,  sine  (prep,  with  abl.). 


COMPOSITION 

65.  A  small  swamp,  which  was  between  our  army  and 
the  enemy,  hindered  our  men  from  beginning  battle.  Caesar 
advised  his  soldiers  not  to  cross  this  swamp,  in  order  that 
they  might  not  be  attacked  in  ^  an  unfavorable  position. 
The  enemy  also  were  afraid  that  their  men  would  cross,  and 
therefore  led  their  forces  back  into  camp.  Caesar,  hav- 
ing delayed  a  little  while  in  order  that  his  men  might  see 
the  departure  of  the  enemy,  ordered  his  forces  to  with- 
draw. Then  the  generals  of  the  enemy  persuaded  their 
men  to  run  down  and  cross  the  fords  ^in  the  rear  of  Cae- 
sar's camp.  Titurius,*  who  had  charge  of  the  fort  there, 
did  not  permit  them  to  cross  without  a  struggle.  He  sent 
a  messenger  to  Caesar  to  ask  him  to  send  reenforcements 

39 


§§  66-6;]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

to  him,  that  he  might  prevent  the  enemy  from  crossing. 
**  I  fear,"  said  he,  "  that  I  cannot  prevent  them  from 
crossing." 

PHRASES,   NOTES,   ETC. 

1.  In  an  unfavorable  position^  iniquo  loco. 

2.  In  rear  of,  post  with  accusative. 


LESSON    IX 
Clauses  of  Result.    Ablative  of  Accompaniment 

What  is  a  clause  of  Result.!^ 

66.  A  clause  of  Result  is  a  clause  which  shows  the  con- 
sequence or  result  of  the  action  of  the  clause  on  which  it 
depends : 

So  great  was  their  fear  that  they  sent  ambassadors  to 
Caesar  about  peace. 

Tantus  eorum  fuit  terror  ut  legates  de  pace  ad  Caesarem 
mitterent. 

How  is  result  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

67.  Result  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  subjunctive  with 
ut  {that,  so  that),  negative  ut  non  {that  not,  so  that  not):    . 

The  sheds  were  so  large  that  they  terrified  the  enemy* 
Vineae  tantae  erant  ut  hostes  terrerent. 

The  swiftness  of  the  enemy  was  so  marvellous  that 
Caesar  had  not  time  to  draw  up  his  line  of  battle. 

Celeritas  hostium  tarn  incredibilis  erat  ut  Caesari  tempus 
ad  exercitum  instruendum  non  esset. 

40 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  68-70 

68.  To  denote  the  persons  or  things  which  accompany 
other  persons  or  things,  the  ablative  is  used  with  the  prep- 
osition cum  : 

They  abandoned  the  town  with  their  wives  and  children. 
Oppidum  cum  coniugibus  puerisque  deseruerunt. 

Note.  —  Cum  may  be  omitted  in  military  phrases : 
He  came^  with  all  his  forces.     Omnibus  copiis  venit. 

What  is  the  effect  of  indirect  discourse  upon  a  clause  of 
result } 

69.  A  clause  of  result,  being  a  subordinate  clause  in  the 
subjunctive,  is  not  affected  by  indirect  discourse,  except  so 
far  as  sequence  requires  a  change  of  tense. 

Review  sequence  of  tenses,  35. 

EXAMPLES 

70.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  subjunctives 
of  result,  and  ablatives  of  accompaniment.  Account  for 
the  tenses  of  the  subjunctives. 

1 .  So  great  a  change  was  made  that  our  men  renezved  tJie 
battle. 

Tanta  commutatio  facta  est  ut  nostri  proelium  redinte- 
grarent. 

2.  So  zvonderful  is  their  speed  that  we  cannot  catch  them. 

Tam  incredibilis  eorum  celeritas  est  ut  eos  capere  non 
possimus. 

3.  They  rushed  out  zvith  all  their  forces. 
Omnibus  copiis  provolaverunt. 

41 


§§  71-72]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

71.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Decide,  constituo,  3,  constitui,  con-      Also,  etiam  (adv.). 

stitutus,  with  infinitive.  Delay ^  mora,  -ae  (f.). 

Disturb,  perturbo,  i.  Especially,  praesertim  (adv.). 

Hasten,  contendd,  3,  contend!,  con-      Fiercely,  acriter  (adv.). 

tentus  (ad,  etc.).  Multitude,      multitudo,     multitu- 

Help,  adiuvo,  i,  adiuvi,  adiutus.  dinis  (f.). 

Kill,  occido,  3,  occidi,  occisus.  Message,  news,  nuntius,  -i  (m.). 

Repulse,    repello,   3,   reppuli,    re-      So,  tarn  (adv.). 

pulsus.  So  great,  tantus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Terror,  terror,  terroris  (m.). 
Weapon,  telum,  -i  (n.). 

COMPOSITION 

72.  Caesar,  to  help  Titurius,  sent  ^  him  the  sHngers  and 
archers  with  the  cavalry.  They  crossed  the  river  with 
great  speed,  and  attacked  the  enemy  so  fiercely,  that  they 
killed  a  great  number  of  them,  and  repulsed  the  rest  by 
the  multitude  of  their  weapons.  So  great  was  the  terror 
of  the  enemy  that  they  thereupon  decided  to  return  home 
with  all  their  forces.  The  Bellovaci  especially  ^  wished  to 
return  home.  They  had  heard  that  Diviciacus  was  laying 
waste  their  territories,  and  they  were  so  disturbed  by  this 
news  that  they  did  not  delay,  but  hastened  home  to  bring 
help  ^to  their  own  people.  ''So  great  is  our  fear  of  the 
Haedui,"  said  they,  ''  that  we  hasten  home  to  defend  our 
wives  and  children." 

NOTES,    PHRASES,   ETC 

1 .  To  him,  ad  eum. 

2.  Wished  to  return,  redire  voluerunt. 

3.  To  their  own  people,  suis. 

42 


A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER  [§§  73-77 

LESSON   X 

Substantive  Clauses  of  Result.     Ablative  of  Cause 

73.  In  the  same  manner  as  a  purpose  clause,  a  clause 
of  result  may  take  the  place  of  the  subject  or  the  object  of 
a  verb. 

What  sort  of  verbs  take  a  substantive  clause  of  result  ? 

74.  We  will  divide  the  verbs  that  take  an  object  clause 
of  result  into  three  classes. 

75.  First  class.  —  A  substantive  clause  of  result  is  used 
as  object  after  verbs  which  denote  that  something  has  been 
brought  to  pass. 

Efficio,  to  britig  about.       Facio,  to  make.      Impetro,  to  obtain  a  request. 

76.  Second  class.  —  A  substantive  clause  of  result  is 
used  as  subject  to  such  impersonals  as : 

Accidit,  it  happens.  Additur,  it  is  added. 

Relinquitur,  //  remains.  Fit,  //  beco7nes,  the  result  is. 

Necesse  est,  //  is  necessary^  one  7nust. 

77.  Third  class.  —  Cf .  62.  Negative  phrases  of  hinder- 
ing,  resisting,  and  doubting  take  a  substantive  clause  of 
result  with  quin  {but  that)  instead  of  ut : 

There  is  no  doubt  that  he  is  gone, 
Non  est  dubium  quin  ierit. 

/  did  not  hinder  Jiim  from  going. 
Non  deterrui  quin  iret. 

43 


§§  7^-79]  A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 

78.  The  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used  to  denote 
Cause : 

They  fled  because  of  fear.     Metu  fugerunt. 

EXAMPLES 

79.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  substantive 
clauses  of  result;  give  reasons  for  all  tenses  of  the  sub- 
junctive and  for  all  ablatives  : 

1.  They  brought  it  about  that  the  setting  out  seemed  vejy 
much  like  a  flight. 

Fecerunt  ut  consimilis  fugae  profectio  videretur. 

2.  They  had  brought  it  about  that  these  hedges  afforded 
fortifications  like  a  wall. 

Effecerant  ut  instar  muri  hae  saepes  munimenta  prae- 
berent. 

3.  Wherefore  the  result  is  that  they  take  upon  themselves 
great  arrogance  in  military  affairs. 

Qua  ex  re  fit  ut  sibi  magnos  spiritus  in  re  militari  sumant. 

4.  There  is  no  doubt  that  tJie  Helvetii  are  the  most  power- 
ful nation  of  the  whole  of  Gaul. 

Non  est  dubium  quin  totius  Galliae  plurimum  Helvetii 
possint. 

5.  They  were  not  able  to  keep  the  Sues siones  from  conspir- 
ing with  these  men. 

Suessiones  deterrere  non  potuerunt  quin  cum  his  consen- 
tirent. 

6.  On  acco7int  of  his  arrival  the  soldiers  were  inspired 
with  hope. 

Adventu  eius  militibus  spes  accessit. 

44 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  80-81 

80.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,  ETC. 

Bring  about ^  effect,  ef&cio,  3,  effeci,  Ambush,  insidiae,  -arum  (f.). 

effectus.  Departure,  profectio,  profectionis 
Depart,  exeo,  exire,  exii,  exitus.  (f.) . 

Doubt,  dubito,  i,  followed  by  quin  Deserted^  desertus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

with  subjunctive.  Doubt,  dubium,  -i  (n.). 

Draw  up,  constituo,  3,  constitui,  Flight,  iugSi, -blq  (f.). 

constitutus.  However,  autem  (adv.). 

Fall  into,  incido,  3,  incidi,  incasurus.  Outcry,  tumultus,  -us  (n.) . 

Pursue,   prosequor,   3,   prosecutus  TV^/j-^,  strepitus, -us  (m.). 

sum.  Rear,  novissimum  agmen  (n.). 
//  remains,  reliquum  est. 
Seem,  seem  best,  videor,  2,  visus 

est. 

COMPOSITION 

81.  The  enemy  therefore  decided  to  return  home.  No 
one  hindered  them  from  setting  out,  and  they  did  not  doubt 
that  they  would  reach  home  in  safety.  But  they  departed 
with  so  much  noise  and  uproar  that  they  brought  it  about 
that  the  setting  out  seemed  just  Hke  a  flight.  It  happened 
that  Caesar  heard  of  their  departure ;  but  he  feared  that  it 
was  a  trick,  and  did  not  send  his  men  to  pursue  the  enemy, 
Uest  they  should  fall  into  some  ambush.  However,  on 
account  of  this  news,  he  drew  up  his  army.  ^At  dawn 
there  was  no  doubt,  because  of  the  deserted  camp,  that  the 
enemy  had  departed,  therefore  it  only  remained  for  Caesar 
to  pursue  the  rear  of  the  enemy. 

NOTES,  PHRASES,  ETC. 

1 .  Lest,  ne,  followed  by  purpose  clause, 

2.  At  dawn,  prima  luce. 

45 


§§  82-84]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

LESSON    XI 

Remarks  on  Purpose  and   Result  Clauses.    Genitive 
AND  Ablative  of  Description 

82.  It  will  be  observed  from  the  last  six  lessons  that 
purpose  and  result  are  expressed  in  Latin  in  the  same 
way,  but  with  one  great  exception,  namely : 

Negative  purpose  is  introduced  by  ne. 
Negative  result  is  introduced  by  ut  .   .   .  non. 

From  this  rule  there  follows  a  difference  between  result 
and  purpose  in  the  following  phrases: 

ENGLISH  PURPOSE  RESULT 

that  no  one,  ne  quis,  ut  nemo. 

that  nothing,  ne  quid,  ut  nihil. 

that  never,  ne  unquam,  ut  nunquam,  etc. 

83.  It  must  be  observed  also  that  a  verb  of  hindering 
when  affirmative  takes  a  purpose  clause  with  ne,  or  the 
infinitive;  but  a  negative  clause  of  hindering  takes  result 
with  quin. 

/  prevented  him  fro  in  gomg. 
Deterrui  ne  iret,  or  prohibuit  eum  ire. 
But : 

/  did  not  prevent  him  from  going, 
Non  impedivi  quin  iret. 

84.  The  genitive  or  ablative  is  used  with  a  modifying 
adjective  to  denote  the.  quality  of  a  person  or  thing. 

Iccius,  a  man  of.  the  highest  nobility. 
Iccius,  vir  summae  nobilitatis  (or  summa  nobilitate). 

46 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  85-86 

EXAMPLES 

85.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  purpose 
and  result  clauses,  account  for  their  tenses,  and  account 
for  all  genitives  and  ablatives: 

1.  They  made  the  wall  very  high  in  order  that  no  one 
might  cross. 

Murum  altissimum  f ecerunt  ne  quis  transiret. 

2.  The  wall  is  so  high  that  7zo  one  can  cross. 
Murus  tarn  altus  est  ut  nemo  transire  possit. 

3.  They  destroyed  the  whole  town  that  nothing  might  be 
left, 

Oppidum  totum  deleverunt  ne  quid  relinqueretur. 

4.  They  destroyed  the  town  to  snch  an  extent  that  nothing 
was  left. 

Tantopere  oppidum  deleverunt  ut  nihil  relinqueretur. 

5.  A  m.an  of  the  greatest  inflnerice  among  his  followers, 
Vir  magnae  auctoritatis  inter  suos. 

6.  They  were  men  of  great  courage, 
Viri  magna  virtu te  fuerunt. 

^ 
86.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Begm,   coepi,   coepisse,   defective      Arrival,  adventus,  -us  (m.). 
followed  by  complementary  in-      Before,  ante  (prep,  with  ace), 
finitive.  Nevertheless,  tamen  (adv.). 

Besiege,  oppugnd,  i.  Siege  engiiie,  opus,  -eris  (n.). 

Lead  tip,  ago,  3,  egi,  actus.  Peace,  pax,  pacis  (f.). 

Size,  magnitudo,  magnitudinis  (f ) . 
7>rr//f^4  permotus, -a, -um  (adj.). 
Use,  usus,  -us  (m.). 

47 


f§  87-88]  A  FIRST   LATIN    WRTrER 


COMPOSITION 


87.  Caesar  led  his  army  into  the  territories  of  the  Sues- 
siones  to  capture  the  town  of  Noviodunum.  He  journeyed 
by  ^  forced  marches,  in  order  that  no  one  of  the  enemy 
might  reach  the  town  before  him.  On  his  arrival  he  be- 
gan to  bring  up  sheds  and  to  prepare  the  other  things 
which  were  of  ^  use  ^  for  besieging  a  town.  The  Sues- 
siones,  although  men  of  great  courage,  were  so  terrified 
by  the  size  of  Caesar's  siege  engines  that  not  one  of  them 
wished  to  defend  the  town.  They  therefore  sent  ambas- 
sadors to  Caesar,  to  sue  for  peace  and  to  ask  that  nothing 
of  theirs  should  be  destroyed,  and  that  no  one  of  their 
wives  or  children  should  be  killed.  Caesar  said  that  he 
would  preserve  them,  but  that  it  pleased  him  that  they 
had  not  withstood  him.  ^  **  For,"  said  he,  *' I  was  on  the 
point  of  so  destroying  your  town  that  nothing  of  it  should 
be  left." 

NOTES,    PHRASES,    ETC. 

1.  Forced marc/ies,  maLgno  itmere, 

2 .  Dative  /or  a  Jise  to. 

3.  Ad  with  gemndive. 

4.  For^  nam. 


LESSON   XII 
Review  of  Lessons  I  to  IV  Inclusive 

88.    Questions  : 

1.  What  is  the  difference  between  direct  and  indirect 
discourse } 

2.  After  what  sort  of  verbs  is  indirect  discourse  used } 
Give  some  of  these  verbs  in  Latin. 

48 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  89-90 

3.  How  do  you  express  indirect  discourse  in  Latin? 
main  clause  ?  subordinate  clause  ? 

4.  On  what  does  the  tense  of  the  main  clause  of  indirect 
discourse  depend?  On  what  does  the  tense  of  the  sub- 
ordinate clause  depend  ? 

5.  After  what  sort  of  verbs  is  the  complementary  in- 
finitive used  ?     Give  these  verbs  in  Latin. 

6.  When  is  the  infinitive  used  as  subject  ? 

7.  What  tense  of  the  infinitive  do  you  usually  use  in  the 
complementary  infinitive  ? 

8.  How  are  end  of  motion,  place  where,  place  from 
which,  extent  of  space,  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

9.  Do  you  know  anything  peculiar  about  place  where, 
to  which,  and  from  which  in  connection  with  names  of 
towns  and  small  islands,  domus,  and  rus  ? 

89.       VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Approach^  advenio,  3,  adveni,  ad-  Elders^  maiSres  natu. 

ventus.  Firsts  primus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Fight  against,  armis  contendd  cum,  Five,  quinque  (num.  indecl.  adj.). 

with  abl.  Hostage,  obses,  obsidis  (c). 

Receive,  accipio,  3,  accepi,  acceptus.  Mile,  millia  passuum. 

Seek,  peto,  3,  petivi,  petitus.  State,  civitas,  civitatis  (f.). 

Show,  ostendo,  3,  ostendi,  ostentus,  Surrender,  deditio,  deditionis  (£.). 

followed  by  indirect  discourse.  Thus,  sic  (adv.). 

6)^r^<2^^///,pand6,3,pandi,  passus.  ^^//,  murus, -i  (m.). 
Stand,  sto,  i,  steti,  status. 

COMPOSITION 

90.  The  Senones  said  that  they  would  send  him,  as  hos- 
tages, those  who  were  the  first  men  of  the  state.  Caesar 
therefore  marched  away  from  Noviodunum  to  the  terri- 
tories of  the  Bellovaci.     This  tribe  collected  all  its  forces 

FIRST  LATIN   WRITER — 4  49 


§  91]  A   FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 

at  Bratuspantium.  About  five  miles  from  this  town  all  the 
elders  approached  Caesar  and  said,  that  they  had  come 
from  the  town  ^to  show  him  that  they  would  not  fight 
against  the  Roman  people.  Caesar  received  them  and 
marched  to  their  town.  On  his  arrival  there  the  women 
and  those  children  who  were  able  to  stand  on  the  wall 
began  to  hold  out  their  hands  to  Caesar,  and  thus,  ^accord- 
ing to  their  custom,  began  to  seek  peace  from  the  Romans. 
Caesar  said  that  it  would  please  him  to  save  the  town, 
and  that  it  would  be  to  their  interest  to  send  him  six 
hundred  hostages. 

NOTES,    PHRASES,    ETC 

1.  To  show  is  followed  by  indirect  discourse. 

2.  According  to  their  ciistoin^  suo  more. 


LESSON    XIII 

Review  of  Lessons  V  to  XI  Inclusive  • 

91.    Questions: 

1.  What  is  a  purpose  clause }     A  clause  of  result } 

2.  How  are  purpose  and  result  usually  expressed  in 
Latin  }     What  is  the  difference  } 

3.  What  is  a  relative  clause  of  purpose  ? 

4.  What  is  the  introducing  Latin  word  when  there  is 
a  comparative  in  a  purpose  clause  } 

5.  What  is  a  substantive  clause.'* 

6.  What  sort  of  verbs  take  a  substantive  clause  of  pur- 
pose .'*  of  result.^     Give  their  Latin  meanings. 

7.  What  difference  is  there  in  a  clause  of  fearing  from 
an  ordinary  purpose  clause } 

8.  How  is  purpose  expressed  in  short  clauses } 

50 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  92-93 

9.    Does   indirect    discourse   change    a   purpose    or   a 
result  clause  at  all? 

10.  How  are  time  when,  within  which,  and  duration  of 
time  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

11.  How  are  means,  agent,  accompaniment,  cause, 
description,  and  manner  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

92.       VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,    ETC 

Bring  upon,  infero,  inferre,  intuli,  Ally,  socius,  -i  (m.). 

illatus.  Disaster,  calamitas,  calamitatis 
Flee,  fugio,  3,  fugi,  fugiturus.  (f.). 

Lead  on,   impello,  3,  impuli,  im-  Friendship,  amicitia,  -ae  (f.). 

pulsus.  Greatest,  maximus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Make  war  on,  bellum  inferre.  Leader,  princeps,  principis  (m.). 

Pardon,   ignosco,  3,  ign5vi,  ign5-  Speed,  celeritas,  celeritatis  (f.). 

tus,  with  dative. 
Plead  for,  verba  facere  pro,  with 

abl. 

COMPOSITION 

93.  Diviciacus  was  sent  for  by  the  Bellovaci  in  order 
that  he  might  plead  for  them,  and  that  they,  by  his  help, 
might  the  more  easily  obtain  pardon  from  Caesar.  He, 
on  his  arrival,  asked  Caesar  to  pardon  them.  He  said 
that  the  Bellovaci  had  ^always  been  allies  of  the  Haeduan 
state;  that  they  had  been  led  on  by  their  leaders,  who 
had  persuaded  them  to  make  war  with  all  their  forces 
upon  the  Roman  people ;  that  now  those  leaders,  though 
men  of  great  courage,  were  so  disturbed  by  the  disaster 
which  they  had  brought  upon  their  state  that  they,  to  save 
themselves,  had  fled  with  the  greatest  speed  into  Britain ; 
that  ^not  only  the  Bellovaci,  ^but  also  the  Haeduans  asked 
that  he  would  use  ^  his  usual  clemency  ^with  regard  to 

SI 


§  93]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

them,  that  he  would  permit  them  to  use  their  towns,  that 
he  would  not  keep  them  from  cultivating  their  fields. 
"Thus,"  said  he,  ''you  will  bring  it  about  that  the  authority 
of  the  Haeduan  state  will  for  many  years  be  increased 
among  the  Belgae."  Lastly  Diviciacus  said,  "You  need 
not  fear  that  they  will  revolt  again,  for  there  is  no  doubt 
that  they  are  terrified  by  your  power." 

NOTES,    PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  Always^\x2i'i\^2X%for  all  titne. 

2.  Not  only  .   .  .  but  also^  non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam. 

3.  His  usual  clemency  ^  sua  dementia. 

4.  With  regard  to  thetn^  in  eos. 


52 


PART    II 


LESSON    XIV 

Conditional   Sentences.     Present,  Past,  and  Future 
Conditions 

94.  A  conditional  sentence  consists  of  two  parts :  (i)  the 
supposition  or  condition,  called  the  Protasis  :  as.  If  Caesar 
is  here:  and  (2)  the  conclusion,  called  the  Apodosis  :  as, 
we  ai^e  safe, 

95.  Note.  —  The  Apodosis  is  therefore  the  main  clause, 
and  the  Protasis  is  the  subordinate  clause. 

How  are  conditional  sentences  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

96.  There  are  six  kinds  of  conditions  : 

(i)   Present.  (4)    Future  less  vivid. 

(2)  Past  (S)   Contrary  to  fact  present. 

(3)  Future  more  vivid.        (6)   Contrary  to  fact  past. 

We  will  discuss  each  in  turn. 

97.  Present  Condition,  i.e.  Condition  in  present  time. 
If  Caesar  is  here^  zve  are  safe. 

Si  Caesar  adest,  conservamur. 

Rule.  —  A  Present  Condition  takes  present  indicative 
in  both  protasis  and  apodosis. 

S3 


§§  98-IOI]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

98.  Past  Condition,  i.e.  Condition  in  past  time. 
If  Caesar  was  here^  we  were  glad. 

Si  Caesar  aderat,  nos  laeti  eramus. 

Rule.  —  A  Past  Condition  takes  some  secondary  indica- 
tive tense  in  both  protasis  and  apodosis. 

99.  Future  Condition  More  Vivid,  i.e.  Condition  in  dis- 
tinct future  time.     English  words,  shall  or  will: 

If  Caesar  shall  be  (or  is^  here,  zve  shall  be  safe. 
Si  Caesar  aderit,  conservabimur. 

Rule.  —  Future  More  Vivid  requires  future  indicative 
in  both  protasis  and  apodosis. 

100.  Future  Less  Vivid,  i.e.  Condition  in  less  distinct 
future  time.     English  words,  should  or  would. 

If  Caesar  should  be  (or  were)  here,  we  should  be  safe. 
Si  Caesar  adsit,  conservemur. 

Rule.  —  Future  Condition  Less  Vivid  requires  present 
subjunctive  in  both  protasis  and  apodosis. 

Note  i.  —  How  do  we  know  in  English  whether  a  future  condition 
is  more  or  less  vivid  ? 

In  the  apodosis  of  a  more  vivid  future  condition  shall  or  will  is  used. 
In  the  apodosis  of  a  less  vivid  future  condition  should  or  would  is 
used. 

Note  2.  —  In  English  the  present  is  usually  used  instead  of  the  future 
in  the  protasis : 

If  Caesar  does  this,  I  shall  go  to  Rojne. 
This  sort  of  present  must  be  translated  into  Latin  by  the  future 
indicative. 

examples 

101.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  apodosis 
and  protasis  of  each  condition  and  show  what  sort  of  a 
condition  is  expressed  : 

54 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  102-103 

1 .  If  the  Gauls  are  conspiring,  Caesar  is  troubled. 
Si  Galli  coniurant,  Caesar  permovetur. 

2.  If  the  Gauls  were  conspiring,  Caesar  was  always 
troubled. 

Si  Galli  coniurabant,  Caesar  semper  permovebatur. 

3.  If  they  will  surrendcry  Caesar  will  save  them. 
Si  se  dedent,  Caesar  eos  conservabit. 

4.  If  they  should  siirre7ider,  Caesar  woidd  save  them. 
Si  se  dedant,  Caesar  eos  conservet. 

5.  If  he  should  do  this,  he  would  heighten  the  influence 
of  the  Haedui. 

Si  hoc  f aciat,  Haeduorum  auctoritatem  amplificet. 

6.  If  he  does  this,  he  will  heighten  the  influence  of  the 
Ha  e  din. 

Si  hoc  faciet,  Haeduorum  auctoritatem  amplificabit. 

102.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Give  up  one's  arms.,  arma  trado,  Always .,  semper  (adv.). 

3,  tradidi,  traditus.  Command,  mandatum,  -i  (n.). 

Obey,  pareo,  2,  followed  by  dative.  Terms,  condicio,  condicionis  (f.) . 

Obtain,   pario,   2,   peperi,  partus.  Services,  meritum,  -i  (n.). 

impetro  (i). 
Surrender,  dedo,  3,  dedidi,  deditus. 

COMPOSITION 

103.  Diviciacus  spoke  to  the  Bellovaci  ^as  follows: 
^  "  Caesar  will  pardon  you  if  you  give  up  your  arms,  but  if 
you  should  send  him  also  six  hundred  hostages,  you  would 
obtain  more  favorable  terms  of  peace.  If  you  are  brave 
men,  the  Romans  are  still  braver,  and  therefore  I  advise 
you  to  surrender  yourselves  and  all  your  belongings  to 

55 


§§  I04-I06]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

Caesar.  If  the  Gauls  have  conspired,  Caesar  has  always 
conquered  them ;  and  if  they  would  only  keep  the  peace, 
our  country  would  not  be  laid  waste  by  war."  Then  the 
Bellovaci  surrendered  and  sent  hostages.  Caesar  there- 
fore praised  Diviciacus  on  account  of  his  services.  ^''If 
you  will  always  obey  my  commands,"  said  he,  "  you  will 
be  the  man  of  greatest  influence  in  Gaul." 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  As  follows^  sic. 

2.  Direct  discourse,  why  ? 


LESSON   XV 

Contrary  to  Fact  Conditions 

What  is  a  Contrary  to  Fact  condition  } 

104.  A  Contrary  to  Fact  condition  is  a  statement  of  what 
would  have  been  the  case  if  a  certain  supposition  were  being 
or  had  been  fulfilled : 

If  Caesar  were  here^  we  should  be  safe, 
(But  Caesar  is  not  here.) 

105.  There  are  two  kinds  of  contrary  to  fact  conditions. 
I.    Present,  i,e.  Contrary  to  Fact  condition  in  present 

time. 

If  Caesar  were  here^  we  should  be  safe. 
Si  Caesar  adesset,  conservaremur. 

Rule.  —  A  present  Contrary  to  Fact  condition  requires 
the  imperfect  subjunctive  in  both  protasis  and  apodosis. 

106.  2.  Past,  i.e.  Contrary  to  Fact  condition  in  past 
time. 

56 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  107-109 

If  Caesar  had  been  present,  we  sJionld  have  been  safe. 
Si  Caesar  adf uisset,  conservati  essemus. 

Rule.  —  A  past  Contrary  to  Fact  condition  requires  plu- 
perfect subjunctive  in  both  protasis  and  apodosis. 

107.  Summary  of  conditions  in  direct  discourse. 

Condition  Protasis  Apodosis 

Present  Present  indicative  Present  indicative 

Past  Secondary  indicative  Secondary  indicative 

Future  more  vivid  Future  indicative  Future  indicative 

Future  less  vivid  Present  subjunctive  Present  subjunctive 

Present  contrary  to  fact  Imperfect  subjunctive  Imperfect  subjunctive 

Past  contrary  to  fact  Pluperfect  subjunctive  Pluperfect  subjunctive 

Remark  on  Si.  —  Si,  if  is  the  word  which  usually  introduces  the 
protasis  of  a  condition  ;  but  other  words  also  may  be  used,  chiefly  the 
compounds  of  si.  Of  these,  those  of  most  frequent  occurrence  are  nisi, 
unless^  if  not^  and  etsi,  although.  The  latter  introduces  a  concessive 
clause.     See  142. 

108.  Nisi  and  etsi  may  introduce  the  protasis  of  any  of 
the  above  conditions. 

EXAMPLES 

109.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  protasis 
and  apodosis  of  the  conditional  sentences  and  show  what 
sort  of  a  condition  exists : 

1 .  If  the  Suessiones  were  the  allies  of  the  Haeduans,  they 
would  not  fight  against  Caesar. 

Si  Haeduorum  socii  Suessiones  essent,  armis  cum  Caesare 
non  contenderent. 

2.  If  Caesar  had  not  sent  help,  the  enemy  would  have 
captured  Bibrax. 

Si  Caesar  auxilium  non  misisset,  hostes  Bibractem  expug- 
navissent. 

S7 


§§  iio-iii]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

3.  There  will  be  no  terms  of  surrender  unless  they  hand 
over  their  arms. 

Deditionis  nulla  erit  condicio  nisi  arma  tradent. 

4.  Although    the    enemy    were   brave ^    Caesar   was    not 
alarmed. 

Etsi  hostes  fortes  erant,  Caesar  non  perturbabatur. 


no.     VOCABULARY 

VERBS  Captive^  captivus,  -i  (m.) . 

Wait  for,  await,  exspecto,  i.  Further,  ulterior,  ulterius  (adj.). 

Find,  invenio,  4,  inveni,  inventus.  On  this  side  of  cis  (prep,  with 

ace  ) . 

NOUNS,  ETC.  River,  flumen,  fluminis  (n.). 

Across,  trans  (prep,  with  ace).  Together    with,    iina    cum    (with 

Bank,  ripa,  -ae  (f.).  abl.). 

Coming,    arrival,     adventus,  -lis  Unprepared,   imparatus,  -a,   -um 

(m.).  (adj.). 


COMPOSITION 

III.  The  captives  said  to  Caesar:  ^  "  If  our  camp  were 
on  this  side  of  the  river  Sabis,  you  would  be  able  to  reach 
it  in  three  days,  but  our  general  has  crossed  the  river  in 
order  to  await  the  coming  of  the  Aduatuci.  If  the  forces 
of  that  tribe  had  been  with  us,  we  should  not  have  awaited 
your  arrival,  but  should  have  attacked  you  ^  of  our  own 
accord.  If  you  were  now  across  the  river,  you  would  come 
upon  our  forces  unprepared,  but,  ^when  you  arrive  on  the 
further  bank,  you  will  find  the  Nervii  together  with  the 
Atrebates  ready  ^for  the  fight.  If  we  were  afraid,  we 
should  send  hostages,  and  accept  your  conditions  of  peace ; 
but  unless  you  are  much  stronger  than  we,  we  hope  to 
defeat  you  easily." 

58 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  112-113 


NOTES,    PHRASES,   ETC. 


1 .  Direct  discourse,  why  ? 

2.  Of  our  own  accord ,  ultro. 

3 .  When  you  arrive,  cum  venies. 

4.  For  the  fight,  ad  pugnandum. 


LESSON   XVI 

Present,  Past,  and  Future  Conditions  in  Indirect 
Discourse 

What  is  the  effect  of  indirect  discourse  upon  conditional 
sentences  ? 

112.  The  effect  upon  conditional  sentences  of  indirect 
discourse  is  as  follows : 

The  apodosis,  being  the  main  clause,  will  go  into  the 
infinitive. 

Present  condition  Present  infinitive. 

Past  condition  Perfect  infinitive. 

Future  condition  Future  infinitive. 

Effect  of  indirect  discourse  upon  the  protasis. 

The  protasis  being  a  subordinate  clause  will  go  into  the 
subjunctive,  but  its  tense  will  depend  upon  the  sequence 
of  tenses  in  indirect  discourse.     11. 

Note.  —  There  is  no  distinction  between  more  vivid  and  less  vivid 
future  conditions  in  indirect  discourse. 

What  happens  if  the  verb  required  for  the  apodosis  of  a 
future  condition  in  indirect  discourse  has  no  supine  stem 
and  therefore  has  no  future  infinitive } 

113.  If  the  verb  required  for  the  apodosis  of  a  future 
condition  in  indirect  discourse  has  no  future  infinitive,  a 

59 


§§114-115]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

paraphrase  must  be  used,  consisting  of  the  future  infinitive 
of  the  verb  sum  followed  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 

114.  Note.  — This  paraphrase  mnst  be  used  also  when 
the  verb  of  the  apodosis  is  passive^  and  may  be  used  in 
any  future  condition  in  indirect  discourse : 

He  said  that,  if  the  yards  were  cut  from  the  masts,  they 
would  fall. 

Dixit,  si  antemnae  ab  malis  absciderentur,  futiirum  esse 
ut  conciderent,  i.e.   it  would  be  that  they  would  fall. 

He  said  that,  if  Caesar  did  not  send  help,  Bibrax  would 
be  captured. 

Dixit,  si  Caesar  auxilium  non  mitteret,  futiirum  esse  ut 
Bibrax  expugnaretur,  i.e.  it  would  be  that  Bibrax  would  be 
captured. 

EXAMPLES 

115.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  protasis 
and  apodosis,  show  what  sort  of  a  condition  is  expressed, 
and  give  reasons  for  all  tenses  of  subjunctives  : 

1.  Diviciacus  says  that  Caesar  would  heighten  the  influ- 
ence of  the  Haedui,  if  he  should  do  this. 

Diviciacus  dicit,  si  Caesar  hoc  fecerit,  Haeduorum  auctori- 
tatem  amplificatiirum  esse. 

2.  He  said  that  if  they  would  surrender,  they  should  be 
safe. 

Dixit,  si  se  dederent,  futiirum  esse  ut  conservarentur. 

3.  He  says  that  the  yards  would  fall,  if  they  were  cut 
off  from  the  masts. 

Dicit  futurum  esse  ut  antemnae  concidant,  si  ab  malis 
abscidantur. 

60 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§116-117 

4.    He  said  that  if  Caesar  were  there,  they  were  safe. 
Dixit  si  Caesar  adesset  eos  conservari. 

116.       VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS 

Determine^  agree  upon,  constituo,      Between,  inter  (prep,  with  ace.)- 
3,  constitui,  constitutus.  Line  of  inarch,  iter,  itineris  (n.). 

Come  between,  intercede,  3,  inter-      One   at    a   time,   singuli,  -ae,  -a 

cessi,  intercessurus.  (adj.). 

Escape,  effugio,  3,  effiigi,  effugitii-      Order,  arrangement,  consuetiido, 
rus.  consuetudinis  (f.). 

Ptan,  consilium,  -i  (n.). 
Separately,  singillatim  (adv.). 
Surrendered,   dediticius,  -a,   -um 
(adj.). 

COMPOSITION 

117.  The  surrendered  Gauls  said  that,  if  Caesar  was 
determined  to  cross  the  river,  they  were  determined  to 
escape  from  Caesar's  camp,  and  to  tell  the  Nervii  of  the 
arrangement  of  our  line  of  march ;  that,  if  the  Nervii 
should  listen  to  their  plan,  they  would  be  able  to  over- 
whelm the  whole  Roman  army.  ^  When  Caesar  marched 
therefore,  they  fled  to  the  Nervii  and  told  them  that  it 
would  be  2  an  easy  thing  to  conquer  the  Romans,  if  they 
should  attack  each  legion  separately.  The  Nervii  replied 
that,  if  the  legions  marched  one  at  a  time,  it  would  not  be 
difficult  to  conquer  them.  The  Gauls  then  told  them  that 
in  our  Hne  of  march  a  great  amount  of  baggage  came 
between  each  legion,  and  that  if  the  first  legion  was 
attacked  on  its  arrival,  they  would  be  able  to  destroy  it 
before  the  others  came  up. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  Wiien  Caesar  marched,  cum  Caesar  iter  faceret,  see  127. 

2.  An  easy  thing,  non  quicquam  negoti,  see  191. 

61 


§§  II8-I20]  A   FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 

LESSON    XVII 

Contrary  to  Fact  Conditions  in  Indirect  Discourse 

What  effect  has  indirect  discourse  on  Contrary  to  Fact 
conditions  ? 

ii8.  In  indirect  discourse  the  protasis  of  a  Contrary  to 
Fact  condition  suffers  no  change ;  but  the  apodosis,  being 
the  main  clause,  uses  the  future  participle,  in  agreement 
with  the  subject  accusative,  and  the  perfect  infinitive  of 
sum,  i.e.  -urum  (or  -uros)  f uisse : 

He  says  (or  He  said)  that  if  Caesar  had  been  there ^  they 
would  have  been  glad. 

Dicit  (or  Dixit)  si  Caesar  adfuisset,  eos  laetos  futures 
fuisse. 

What  happens  in  a  Contrary  to  Fact  condition  when 
there  is  no  supine  stem  of  the  verb  required,  and  therefore 
no  future  participle  ? 

119.  In  a  Contrary  to  Fact  condition,  when  there  is  no 
supine  stem  of  the  verb  in  the  apodosis,  a  paraphrase  is 
used,  consisting  of  the  future  participle  of  sum,  with  fuisse 
and  ut  with  the  imperfect  subjunctive : 

He  says  (or  He  said)  that  if  the  yai'ds  had  been  cut 
from  the  masts,  they  would  have  fallen. 

Dicit  (or  Dixit)  si  antemnae  ab  malis  abscisae  essent 
futiirum  fuisse  ut  conciderent  (i.e.  it  would  have  been  that 
they  would  fall\ 

120.  Note.  —  This  paraphrase  may  be  used  in  any  Con- 
trary to  Fact  condition  in  indirect  discourse,  an^  must  be 
used  if  the  verb  of  apodosis  \%  passive. 

62 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  121 


EXAMPLES 


121.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  apodosis 
and  protasis,  show  what  sort  of  a  condition  is  expressed 
in  each  sentence,  and  account  for  all  subjunctive  tenses :  ; 

1 .  He  says  tJiat^  if  Caesar  had  beefi  there ^  Bibrax  would 
not  have  been  captured. 

Dicit,  si  Caesar  adfuisset,  futurum  fuisse  ut  Bibrax  non 
expugnaretur. 

2.  He  said  that  the  Sicessioncs  would  not  now  be  fighting 
against  Caesar ^  if  they  were  the  allies  of  the  Haeduans. 

Dixit  Suessiones  iam  cum  Caesare  non  contenturos  fuisse, 
si  Haeduorum  socii  essent. 

3.  He  says  that,  if  the  yards  had  been  cut  aivay  from  the 
masts,  they  would  have  fallen. 

Dicit,  si  antemnae  ab  malis  abscisae  essent,  futurum  fuisse 
ut  conciderent. 

4.  Caesar  replied  that  he  would  have  spared  them,  if  they 
had  surrendered  their  arms. 

Caesar  respondit  se  eos  conservaturum  fuisse,  si  arma 
tradidissent. 


63 


§  122} 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


O. 


Q 

o 
u 

o 

>^ 
on 

< 

D 


■2  ? 

i  ^ 

^ 

y) 

-^    w 

i. 

•5  w 

i) 

1^ 

si 

HH        p 

o  :5 

o 

g 

^ 

■^1 

S 

*l  1 

d 

w 

o 
u 

0 

2 

<3 

0) 

> 

'S 

.s 
1 

> 

'S 

II 

0 

> 

d 

o 

.s 
.s 

s.  a 

11 

^    i?    S 

d       *-<       03 

o 

^ 
^ 
.£ 

^ 

'? 

■n 
1 1 1 

.a 
i  t 

V5 

Cfl 

^.g 

Ml! 

;3    vh 

d 

s 

'> 

5       d     -in 

c 

<u 

C 

■!=;    53 

3 

P     "d      S 

•y 

.a.  d  ^ 

Q 

H 

>• 

Ui      4-> 

d  ^ 

rt 

'> 

o    d  M-i 

d 

"S  .S^ 

Oh 

Oh 

t, 

C/} 

tlH 

tn 

> 

O 

^ 

1^ 

fl     > 
d     o 

O    T3 

^ 

o 

m 
^ 

CJ 

3 
2 

511 

1 

> 

c 
'o 

1 

.2 

d   i^ 

0) 

> 

.s 

*0 

d 

T3 

2 

2^ 

d 

g 

o 

■'5 
*> 

d 

d 

3 

1 
1 

£ 

Oh 

CT) 

s 

> 

0) 

<L> 
> 

0) 

c3 

.> 

o 

O 

> 

O 

<L) 

c 

c 

CO 

(3 

o 

d 

^d 

d 

d 

o 

CJ 

p 

Q 

-3 

lo" 

c/3 

w 

2 

< 

15 

3 

d 
d 

d 
d 

C/3 

2:^ 

1 

t 

d 

Oh 

E 

U^ 

cu 

s 

> 

l; 

<u 
> 

.> 

o 

(U 

rt 

> 

o 

t3 

d 

u 

> 

o 

(U 

*-t-» 

d 

C/3 

5 

< 

1 

> 

1 

d 

•5^ 

d 
3 

d 
d 

Q 

H 

'S 

!5^ 

^ 

C/} 

O 

OS 

d 

d 
d 

d 

C/3 

S-i 

1 

S 

a. 

0^ 

tL. 

Oh 

K 

1° 
^=1 

'  > 

¥ 

1 

43 

o 

-*-« 

"> 

1 

o 

o 

H 

c 

^_, 

^ 

U2 

c/3 

u 

Q 

1 

£ 

Oh 

t-5 

^<» 

o 

b  d 

2    ^ 

o 

d  '> 

1 

d 
d 

1 

d    S^ 
o    a, 
U 

d  !§ 

o   a 

64 


A  PIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  123-124 

123.      VOCABULARY 

VERBS  NOUNS 

Employ^  occupo,  i.  Attack^  impetus,  -us  (m.). 

Follow^   subsequor,   3,   subsecutus      In  light  marching  order,  expedi- 

sum.  tus,  -a,  -um  (adj . ) . 

Fortify,  muni5,  4.  Operation,  opus,  -operis  (n.). 

Hold   one's  ground,   consists,   3,       7»?/^,  tempus,  temporis  (n.). 

constiti. 
Keep,  habeo,  2. 
Send  ahead,  praemitto,   3,  prae- 

misi,  praemissus. 

COMPOSITION 

124.  Caesar  said  that,  if  he  had  kept  the  same  order  of 
march  which  the  deserters  had  reported  to  the  Nervii,  he 
would  have  been  overcome  by  the  Nervii ;  but  that  he  had 
sent  ahead  the  cavalry  and  had  followed  them  with  six  le- 
gions in  light  marching  order.  He  said  that  these  legions 
came  to  the  camp  and  fortified  it,  and  that  if  they  had  not 
been  employed  in  this  operation,  they  would  easily  have 
repulsed  the  first  attack  of  the  Nervii ;  that  if  the  cavalry 
had  only  held  their  ground,  he  would  have  had  time  to  draw 
up  his  forces  in  line  of  battle  ;  and  that  at  that  time  he  had 
said  ^to  himself,  if  only  the  cavalry  were  Romans,  they 
would  easily  hold  their  ground  and  not  be  so  easily 
repulsed. 

Phrase 

I .  To  himself,  secum. 

Note.  —  Before  entering  upon  the  study  of  Lesson  XVIII,  Review 
Lesson  XXIV  may  be  studied. 


FIRST  LATIN  WRITER  —  5  5 1 


§§  125--127]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

LESSON    XVIII 
Temporal  Clauses.     The  First  Cum 

What  is  a  temporal  clause  ? 

125.  A  temporal  clause  is  a  subordinate  clause  which  is 
introduced  by  some  relative  adverb  of  time  or  conjunction 
of  time : 

When  neither  army  began  to  cross,  Caesar  led  his  men 
back  into  camp. 

Vbi  neutri  transeundi  initium  fecerunt,  Caesar  suos  in 
castra  reduxit. 

What  are  these  relative  adverbs  and  conjunctions  of 
time  ? 

126.  The  relative  adverbs  and  conjunctions  of  time  used 
to  introduce  temporal  clauses  are  as  follows  : 

First  kind.     Those  that  take  the  indicative. 

Vbi,  when, 

Vt,  when.     Vt  primum,  as  soon  as, 

Postquam,  after. 

These  particles  are  usually  followed  by  the  perfect  in- 
dicative. 

127.  Second  kind.  Those  that  take  the  indicative  or 
subjunctive  according  to  their  temporal  significance. 

Cum,  when. 
Priusquam,  before. 

Cum,  when  it  defines  the  time  of  the  main  clause,  takes 
the  indicative  in  whatever  tense  the  context  requires  : 

66 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  12S 

When  Caesar  came  into  Gaul^  the  leaders  of  one  party 
were  the  Haediii,  of  the  other  the  Seqiiani. 

Cum  Caesar  in  Galliam  venit,  alterius  factionis  principes 
erant  Haedui,  alterius  Sequani. 

But  when  the  cum  clause  merely  denotes  what  was 
happenmg  or  had  happened  at  the  time  of  the  action  of 
the  main  clause,  cum  is  followed  by  the  imperfect  or  plu- 
perfect subjunctive  : 

The  Bellovaciy  having  betaken  themselves  and  all  their 
possessions  into  the  town^  sought  peace  from  Caesar. 

Bellovaci,  cum  se  suaque  omnia  in  oppidum  contulissent, 
pacem  a  Caesare  petierunt. 

Priusquam  is  followed  usually  by  the  perfect  indicative 
or  imperfect  subjunctive;  but  if  the  verb  of  the  main 
clause  is  primary,  then  priusquam  is  usually  followed  by 
the  present  tense  indicative  or  subjunctive. 

128.  Third  kind.  Those  that  take  the  indicative  or 
subjunctive  according  to  their  meaning. 

Dum,  zvhile,  until. 
Donee,  as  long  as. 
Quoad,  as  long  as. 

Dum  meaning  zvhile  takes  the  present  indicative  ;  but 
when  dum  means  7intil  it  takes  the  present  or  imperfect 
subjunctive  : 

While  Caesar  waited  in  these  places,  ambassadors  came 
to  him. 

Dum  in  his  locis  Caesar  moratur,  ad  eum  legati  venerunt. 
But: 

67 


§§  129-130]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

He  waited  until  the  rest  of  the  ships  should  come  together, 

Dum  reliquae  naves  convenirent,  exspectavit. 

Donee  and  quoad,  meaning  as  long  as,  take  the  indicative. 

Note.  —  These  words  also  mean  trntil,  2m6.  then  usually  take  the 
subjunctive. 

129.  To  denote  future  time  in  a  temporal  clause,  the 
future  indicative  must  be  used  with  cum. 

EXAMPLES 

130.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  temporal 
clauses  and  give  reasons  for  every  use  of  the  indicative  or 
subjunctive: 

1 .  When  the  wall  was  stripped  of  defenders,  the  Gauls 
advanced  and  undermined  the  walls. 

Vbi  murus  defensoribus  nudatus  est,  Galli  succedunt  mu- 
rumque  subruunt  (historical  present). 

2.  After  he  saw  that  all  the  forces  of  the  Belgians  were 
coming  against  him,  he  hastened  to  lead  his  army  across  the 
Axona. 

Postquam  omnis  copias  Belgarum  ad  se  venire  vidit, 
Axonam  exercitum  traducere  maturavit. 

3.  When  the  ropes  were  cut,  the  yards  fell. 
Vt  funes  abscisi  sunt,  antemnae  conciderunt. 

4.  While  these  things  were  taking  place  amongst  the 
Veneti,  Sabinus  reached  the  territories  of  the   Venelli. 

Dum  haec  in  Venetis  geruntur,  Sabinus  in  fines  Venel- 
lorum  pervenit. 

5.  As  long  as  he  was  able  he  resisted  bravely. 
Quoad  potuit  fortissime  restitit. 

68 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  131-132 

6.  When  they  from  time  to  time  betook  themselves  into 
the  forests  to  their  friends  arid  made  an  attack  back  again 
from  the  forests  on  our  men,  and  our  men  did  not  dare  to 
follow  them,  when  they  fled,  farther  than  to  that  point  to 
which  the  open  places  extended,  the  six  legions  meanwhile 
began  to  fortify  the  camp. 

Cum  se  illi  identidem  in  silvas  ad  suos  reciperent,  ac 
rursus  ex  silva  in  nostros  impetum  facerent,  neque  nostri 
longius  quam  quern  ad  finem  loca  aperta  pertinebant  ce- 
dentis  insequi  auderent,  interim  legiones  sex  castra  munire 
coeperunt. 

7.  Caesar  led  his  army  into  the  territories  of  the  Sues- 
siones  before  the  enemy  recovered  from  their  flight, 

Caesar,  priusquam  se  hostes  ex  terrore  reciperent,  in  fines 
Suessionum  exercitum  duxit. 

131.  VOCABULARY 

VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Draw  off,  detraho,  3,  detraxi,  de-      Battle  line,  acies,  aciei  (f.). 

tractus.  Coverings,  tegimentum,  -i  (n.). 

Haste7t,  contendo,  3,  contendi,  con-      Forest,  woods,  silva,  -ae  (f.) . 

tentus.  Shield,  scutum,  -i  (n.). 

Lie  hid,  lateo,  3,  latui. 
Put  to  flight,  f ugo,  I  ;  cf.  fugio,  to 

flee. 
Rush  forth,  provolo,  i. 

132.  COMPOSITION 

When  ^the  van  of  our  baggage  was  seen  by  the  enemy, 
who  lay  hid  in  the  forest,  they  rushed  forth  and  made  an 
attack  on  our  cavalry,  who  fought  bravely  until  they  were 
overcome  by  the  number  of  the  enemy.  When  the  Nervii 
had  repulsed  these  so  quickly  that  they  reached  our  camp 

69 


§§  133-134]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

before  our  men  were  ready  to  receive  them,  they  tried  to 
capture  our  army.  Our  men,  however,  when  they  saw  that 
the  cavalry  were  put  to  flight,  ^ran  to  arms;  but  before 
they  could  arrange  their  line  of  battle,  and  while  they  were 
drawing  off  the  coverings  from  their  shields,  the  enemy 
broke  into  the  camp.  Nevertheless,  as  long  as  the  tenth 
legion  remained  in  camp  the  enemy  were  repulsed,  but 
when  that  legion  left  its  place  on  the  left  wing  in  order 
to  pursue  the  Atrebates,  the  enemy  began  to  surround  our 
army  on  that  flank. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  The  vail  of  our  baggage,  prima  impedimenta. 

2.  To  run  to  arins^  ad  arma  concurrere. 


LESSON   XIX 

Causal  Clauses.      The  Second   Cum.      Comparatives 
WITH  Quam.     Ablative  of  Comparison 

What  is  a  causal  clause  t 

133.  A  causal  clause  gives  the  reason  for  the  action  of 
the  clause  on  which  it  depends  : 

They  conspired  becaicse  they  feared  that  our  army  ivoiild 
be  led  against  them. 

Coniuraverunt  quod  vererentur  ne  ad  eos  exercitus  noster 
adduceretur. 

How  are  causal  clauses  expressed  in  Latin  } 
Causal  clauses  may  be  divided  into  two  classes. 

134.  First  class. 

Quod,  quia,  and  quoniam,  because,  are  followed  by : 

70 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  135-136 

{a)  The  indicative,  if  the  reason  given  is  on  the  authority 
of  the  writer  or  speaker. 

But  by : 

{b)  The  subjunctive,  if  the  reason  given  is  on  theauthor- 
ity  of  some  other  person : 

The  Helvetii  surpass  the  rest  of  the  Gauls  in  valor  be- 
cause they  fight  almost  daily  battles  with  the  Germans. 

Helvetii  reliquos  Gallos  virtute  praecedunt,  quod  fere 
cotidianis  proeliis  cum  Germanis  contendunt  (writer's  au- 
thority). 

But: 

Caesar,  complaining  because  they  had  made  war  without 
good  reason,  said  that  he  would pardofi  their  indiscretion, 

Caesar  questus,  quod  bellum  sine  causa  intulissent 
(Caesar's  authority),  se  ignoturum  imprudentiae  dixit. 

Note.  —  Quod  meaning  because  is  the  word  most  frequently  used. 
Quia  is  used  less  frequently  and  usually  takes  the  indicative.  Quoniam 
means  inasmuch  as  rather  than  because. 

135.  Second  class. 

Cum  causal,  meaning  since  in  the  sense  of  because,  takes 
the  subjunctive : 

Since  each  one  hastened  to  return  home,  they  made  the 
setting  out  seem  very  much  like  a  flight. 

Cum  quisque  domum  pervenire  properaret,  fecerunt  ut 
consimilis  fugae  profectio  videretur. 

How  is  comparison  expressed  in  Latin } 

136.  Comparison  is  usually  expressed  by  quam  meaning 
than,  which  takes  the  same  case  after  it  as  before  it  : 

71 


§§  137-138]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

The  Romans  are  braver  than  tJie  Gauls. 
Fortiores  quam  Galli  Romani  sunt. 
But : 

137.  When  the  person  or  thing  to  be  compared  is  nomi- 
native or  accusative,  the  ablative  without  quam  may  be 
used  of  the  person  or  thing  with  which  some  one  or  some- 
thing is  compared : 

The  Romans  are  braver  than  the  Gauls, 
Gallis  fortiores  sunt  Romani. 

Caution.  —  Never  use  the  ablative  of  comparison  when  the  thing  to 
be  compared  is  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative. 

EXAMPLES 

138.  Point  out  the  causal  clauses,  account  for  the  moods 
and  tenses  of  all  the  subordinate  verbs,  and  account  for 
the  cases  of  the  things  compared  in  the  following  sen- 
tences : 

1 .  He  tried  to  capticre  that  town  on  the  march,  because  he 
had  heard  that  it  was  destitute  of  defenders. 

Id  oppidum  ex  itinera  expugnare  conatus  est,  quod  va- 
cuum ab  defensoribus  esse  audiebat 

2.  They  began  to  taunt  our  men  because  so  great  an 
engirte  of  ivar  was  being  set  up  at  so  great  a  distance, 

Increpitabant  vocibus  quod  tanta  machinatio  ab  tanto 
spatio  institueretur. 

3.  Since  they  thought  that  there  was  no  obstacle  in  the 
way  of  the  conquerors  and  no  safety  for  the  conquered,  they 
sent  ambassadors  to  Caesar. 

Cum  victoribus  nihil  impeditum,  victis  nihil  tutum  arbi- 
trarentur,  legates  ad  Caesarem  miserunt. 

72 


A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER  [§§  139-140 

4.    The  tower  was  higher'  than  the  wall. 
Turris  quam  murus  altior  erat,  or  Turris  muro  altior 
erat. 

139.       VOCABULARY 

VERBS  Expectation^  opinio,  opinionis  (f.) . 

^  ,     .  Fierce,  acer,  acris,  acre  (adj.)- 

Encourage,  cohortor,  i.  ^        '         '..., 

„    .        *    .  _  «  «    r  ^^«^«  On  account  of.  propter  (prep,  with 

/I'^/i'^,  propono,  3,  proposui,  propo-  ^  y?*-    ^       \v    if 

..  ace). 

Tvl/rexercito  i.  /'w^//^^,  praesentia, -ae  (f.). 

'  '  Short,  brevis,  -is,  -e  (adj.). 

Signal,  signum,  -i  (n.). 
NOUNS,  ETC.  standard,  vexillum,  -i  (n.). 

An  advance,  successus,  iis  (m.).         Sudden,  subitus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Customary,  usitatus,  -a,  -um  (adj .) .      Trumpet,  tuba,  tubae  (f.) . 

COMPOSITION 

140.  Caesar,  because  the  time  was  short,  was  hindered 
from  giving  the  customary  orders.  Therefore,  because  the 
standard  was  not  raised,  the  soldiers  did  not  run  to  arms, 
and  because  the  trumpet  did  not  give  the  signal,  the  sol- 
diers did  not  come  back  from  the  ^work  on  the  fortifica- 
tions. Also,  since  the  advance  of  the  enemy  was  so  sudden, 
Caesar  had  no  time  to  encourage  his  men ;  but  the  lieuten- 
ants, because  the  enemy  were  so  near,  did  what  seemed  best 
to  them,  and  the  soldiers,  because  they  had  been  trained  in 
former  battles,  were  able  to  do  ^what  was  necessary  to 
be  done.  Caesar  also,  because  the  attack  of  the  enemy 
seemed  fiercer  than  he  had  expected,  entered  the  line  of 
battle  himself,  and  the  soldiers,  because  their  leader  seemed 
to  be  in  danger,  fought  with  the  greatest  bravery;  but  inas- 
much as  the  enemy  had  possession  of  the  camp,  the  result 
of  the  battle  was  most  uncertain. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  Work  on  the  fortifications,  opus,  -eris  (n.). 

2.  What  was  necessary  to  be  done,  quid  fieri  oporteret.     See  igo. 

73 


§§  141-142]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

LESSON   XX 

Clauses  of  Concession.      The  Third  Cum.     Ablative 
OF  Degree  of  Difference 

What  is  a  clause  of  concession  ? 

141.  A  clause  of  concession  is  a  subordinate  clause  which 
denotes  a  fact  in  spite  of  which  the  action  of  the  main 
clause  takes  place,  will  take  place,  or  has  taken  place : 

Although  he  was  in  an  unfavorable  position,  Caesar 
began  the  battle. 

Cum  in  iniquo  loco  esset,  Caesar  proelium  commisit. 

How  are  concessive  clauses  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

142.  Concessive  clauses  are  expressed  by : 

1.  Cum,  although,  though,  with  the  subjunctive  : 

Though  these  things  are  so,  nevertheless  he  will  make 
peace  ivith  thejn. 

Cum  ea  ita  sint,  tamen  cum  eis  pacem  faciet. 

2.  Etsi,  even  if,  although,  with  the  construction  of  prota- 
sis;   108: 

Although  on  account  of  their  n?imbers  they  thought  that 
they  would  fight  successftdly,  still  they  thought  it  was 
safer,  etc. 

Etsi  propter  multitudinem  se  tuto  dimicaturos  esse  existi- 
mabant,  tamen  tutius  esse  arbitrabantur,  .  .  .  etc. 

3.  Quamquam  with  the  indicative,  but  only  when  the 
clause  of  concession  is  an  admitted  fact : 

Although  he  was  covered  with  wounds,  he  fought  bravely. 
Quamquam  vulneribus  confectus  est,  acriter  pugnabat. 

74 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  143-144 

143.  The  Degree  of  Difference  between  one  thing  and 
another  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  case  : 

The  tower  zvas  five  feet  higher  than  the  wall. 
Tunis  quinque  pedibus  altior  muro  erat. 

Caution.  —  Do  not  become  confused  between  the  ablative  of  com- 
parison and  the  ablative  of  degree  of  difference.  The  ablative  of  com- 
parison denotes  the  person  or  thing  by  which  another  is  compared  ; 
but  the  ablative  of  degree  of  difference  denotes  by  how  much  one  thing 
differs  from  another.  In  the  sentence  above,  which  is  the  ablative  of 
comparison  and  which  the  ablative  of  degree  of  difference  ? 

EXAMPLES 

144.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  clauses  of 
concession,  account  for  the  subordinate  moods  and  tenses, 
and  give  reasons  for  all  the  ablatives : 

1.  Althoicgh  the  Siievi  had  not  been  able  to  cast  them  out 
of  their  territories,  nevertheless  they  made  thein  tributary  to 
them, 

Eos  cum  Suevi  finibus  expellere  non  potuissent,  tamen 
vectigales  sibi  fecerunt. 

2.  TJioiigh  the  winters  are  early  iit  these  places,  nevertJie- 
less  he  hastened  to  set  out  for  Britain, 

Etsi  in  his  locis  maturae  sunt  hiemes,  tamen  in  Britan- 
niam  proficisci  contendit. 

3.  Although  Caesar  was  a  skillfnl general,  he  was  almost 
conquered  by  the  Nervii. 

Quamquam  Caesar  dux  peritus  erat,  prope  a  Nerviis  super- 
atus  est. 

4.  The  infantry  of  the  NeTuii  fought  mtich  better  than 
the  horsemen  of  the  Gauls. 

Peditatus  Nerviorum  quam  Gallorum  equites  multo  fortius 
pugnabant. 

75 


§§  I45~H6]  a   first  LATIN   WRITER 

145.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,  ETC. 

Be  away,  absum,  abesse,  abfui.  At  once,  sine  mora. 

Co7ne  to,  advenio,  4,  adveni,  adven-  Foot,  pes,  pedis  (m.). 

tus.  Inch,  digitus,  -i  (m.). 

Repulse,  repello,  3,  reppuli,  repul-  Two,  duo,  duae,  duo  (num.  adj.). 

sus .  Unexpected,  subitus,  -a,  -um  (adj . ) . 

Take  one's  stand  at,  consist©  ad  ^<a;/<i?r,  virtiis, -tiitis  (f.). 

with  ace. 

COMPOSITION 

146.  Although  each  soldier  ^  ought  to  have  taken  his 
stand  at  the  standard  of  his  own  legion,  still  the  time  was 
so  short  that  each  man  took  his  stand  ^  at  the  first  standard 
he  came  to.  Although  Caesar  ^  ought  to  have  encouraged 
the  men,  still  the  advance  of  the  enemy  was  so  unexpected 
that  he  had  no  time  for  a  long  speech,  but  at  once  gave 
the  signal  for  battle.  Then,  however,  although  the  Nervii 
were  at  the  walls,  he  encouraged  his  soldiers  to  remember 
their  former  valor,  not  to  fear  the  enemy,  though  these 
men  were  many  inches  taller  than  they,  and  with  their 
usual  bravery  to  repel  the  attack  of  the  Nervii.  Then  he 
himself  led  the  soldiers  to  battle  though  the  enemy  were 
only  ^twenty  feet  away. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,  ETC. 

1 .  Ought,  translate  by  oportuit,  //  behooved,  followed  by  accusative 
and  infinitive  :  thus,  //  behooved  the  soldiers  to,  etc. 

2.  At  the  first  standards,  ad  prima  signa. 

3.  Ablative  of  degree  of  difference. 


76 


A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER  [§  147 

LESSON   XXI 

Ablative  Absolute 

For  what  purpose  is  an  Ablative  Absolute  used  ? 

147.  A  noun  or  a  pronoun  with  a  participle,  or  with  an 
adjective,  or  with  another  noun,  may  be  put  into  the 
ablative  to  denote : 

1.  The  time, 

2.  The  cause, 

3.  The  condition,  or 

4.  The  attending  circumstances,  of  an  action. 

examples 

1 .  Caesar,  when  the  Nervii  had  been  conquered,  returned 
to  camp. 

Caesar,  Nerviis  superatis,  se  ad  castra  recepit. 
That  is,   Caesar,  the  Nervii  having  been  conquered,  re- 
turned to  camp. 

2.  Because  they  despaired  of  our  success  they  hastened 
home. 

Desperatis  nostris  rebus,  domum  contenderunt. 

That  is,  Our  fortuues  being  despaired  of,  they  hastened 
home. 

3.  He  said  that  if  Caesar  were  leader,  they  would  over- 
come the  Gauls. 

Dixit  eos,  Caesare  imperante,  Gall6s  superaturos  esse. 

That  is,  Caesar  being  leader. 

4.  In  Caesar  s  presence  the  men  fought  bravely. 
Caesare  praesente,  milites  fortiter  pugnabant. 

77 


§  148]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

Example  of  a  noun  and  an  adjective : 

When  a  small pai^t  of  the  summer  ivas  left. 

Exigua  parte  aestatis  reliqua. 

That  is,  A  small  part  of  the  summer  being  left. 

Example  of  two  nouns  : 

Under  the  leadership  of  Boduognattis. 

Boduognato  duce. 

That  is,  Boduognatits  being  leader. 

Note.  —  In  these  last  two  examples  the  present  participle  of  the  verb 
to  be^  beings  is  understood,  as  there  is  no  form  in  Latin  for  the  present 
participle  of  sum. 

148.    How  and  when  to  use  the  Ablative  Absolute. 

1.  An  Ablative  Absolute  requires  a  subject  and  a  predicate  of  its 
own.  Therefore  never  use  the  ablative  absolute,  unless  it  is  possible 
to  make  out  of  the  subordinate  clause  a  subject  and  a  predicate  wholly 
separate  from  the  subject  and  predicate  of  the  main  clause. 

Thus,  the  ablative  absolute  is  impossible  in : 

Caesar  having  returned  to  the  province  levied  two  legions : 

Impossible  because  Caesar  is  subject  of  both  clauses. 

But  in  the  sentence.  They  hastened  hof?te,  because  they  despaired  of  our 
success^  it  is  possible  to  use  the  ablative  absolute,  because  the  subordinate 
clause  admits  of  a  subject  and  a  predicate  separate  from  the  main  clause. 

Our  success  being  despaired  of  they  hastened  home. 

2.  When  a  participle  is  used  with  the  ablative  absolute,  it  is  either 
the  present  active  or  the  perfect  participle  passive  which  is  used. 
Therefore,  use  the  ablative  absolute  only  when  the  present  active  or 
perfect  participle  passive  can  be  used. 

In  the  sentence,  When  the  Nervii  had  surrendered  Caesar  re- 
turned to  camp,  it  is  impossible  to  use  the  ablative  absolute  because 
there  is  no  perfect  active  participle;  and  the  subordinate  clause  does 
not  admit  of  a  change  into  the  passive,  because  the  verb  is  intransitive. 
But  when  the  verb  is  transitive,  such  a  change  is  possible  and  an 
ablative  absolute  may  be  used :  thus,  in  the  sentence,  Caesar^  having 

78 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRirER  [§  149 

demanded  hostages^  7'eiiirned  to  ca;np,  the  subordinate  clause  can  be 
.  changed  into,  hostages  having  beeji  demanded,  and  so  may  be  trans- 
lated by  the  ablative  absolute. 

Note.  —  Here  is  manifest  the  usefulness  of  a  deponent  verb,  because 
such  a  verb,  having  a  perfect  participle  of  transitive  meaning,  it  is  pos- 
sible to  translate  directly  from  English  into  Latin  without  making  use 
of  the  ablative  absolute  or  a  temporal  clause : 

Caesar,  haviitg  encouraged  the  soldiers,  gave  the  signal  for  battle. 
Caesar,  cohortatus  milites,  signum  proelii  committendi  dedit. 

But  in  the  sentence,  Caesar,  having  demanded  hostages^  returned  to 
camp,  as  there  is  no  perfect  participle  active,  we  are  forced  to  use  an 
ablative  absolute  in  the  passive  or  a  temporal  clause. 

EXAMPLES 

149.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  ablative  ab- 
solutes and  show  to  which  of  the  four  kinds  each  belongs : 

1.  When  the  battle  had  beeii  renewed,  they  threw  the 
enemy   into  flight, 

Redintegrato  proelio,  hostes  in  f ugam  coniecerunt. 

2.  Because  the  report  had  been  confirmed,  he  sent  ahead 
the  cavalry. 

Confirmata  re,  equitatum  praemisit. 

3.  He  said  that  there  was  no  condition  of  surrender  if 
the  arms  were  not  handed  over. 

Dixit  deditionis  nullam  esse  condicionem,  nisi  armis 
traditis. 

4.  This  was  tJie  year  ivhen  Gnaens  Pompey  and  Ma^xiis 
Crassns  zvere  cons7ils. 

Qui  fuit  annus,  Gnaeo  Pompeio,  Marco  Crasso  consulibus. 

5.  The  Nervii  under  the  leadership  of  Boduognatiis  has- 
tened to  that  place. 

Nervii,  duce  Boduognato,  ad  eum  locum  contenderunt. 

79 


150-151]  A  FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 


150.  VOCABULARY 


VERBS  Military  science^  res  militaris  (f.). 

Leave,  relinquo^ 3,  reliqui,  relictus.  More,  magis  (comparative  adv.). 

Remain,  remaneo,  2,  remanci,  re-  Neither  .  .  .  nor,  neque  . .  .  neque. 

mansus.  Regular,  certus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 


NOUNS,   ETC. 

Destitute,  vacuus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Hedgey  saepes,  -is  (f.). 


VieWf  prospectus,  -us  (m.). 


COMPOSITION 

151.  ^  Because  the  army  had  been  drawn  up  more  as  the 
nature  of  the  place  than  as  miHtary  science  demanded,  he 
was  unable  to  place  regular  reserves;  and  ^ because  the 
view  of  the  soldiers  was  hindered  by  hedges,  he  could  not 
give  all  the  commands  himself.  The  soldiers,  however, 
fought  most  bravely,  especially  the  men  of  the  tenth  legion, 
who,  ^  when  the  Atrebates  had  been  overcome,  drove  this 
part  of  the  enemy's  line  down  to  the  river.  They  pursued 
these  men  a  little  too  far ;  because  ^  by  their  absence  the 
left  wing  was  left  destitute  of  defenders  and  thus  the  Nervii 
were  able  to  obtain  possession  of  that  part  of  our  line;  ^a 
thing  which  they  never  could  have  done,  ^if  the  tenth 
legion  had  protected  that  flank.  However,  Caesar  ran  to 
that  place,  and  ^  under  his  leadership  the  Nervii  were 
driven  back. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  Translate  by  ablative  absolute. 

2.  By  their  absence,  they  being  absent,  ablative  absolute. 

3.  A  thing  which,  id  quod. 


80 


A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER  [§§  152-155 

LESSON   XXII 

Clauses  of  Characteristic.     Ablative  of  Specifica- 
tion.    Ablative  after  Vtor,  etc. 

What  is  a  clause  of  characteristic  ? 

152.  A  clause  of  characteristic  is  a  subordinate  relative 
clause  used  to  denote  some  peculiar  quality  of  the  subject 
or  object  of  the  clause  on  which  it  depends : 

There  were  only  two  roads  by  which  they  might  emigrate, 
Erant  omnino  duo  itinera,  quibus  itineribus  exire  possent. 

That  is,  there  were  other  roads,  but  these  two  were  the 
only  ones  which  led  out  of  their  territories. 

How  is  a  clause  of  characteristic  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

153.  A  relative  clause  of  characteristic  is  introduced  by 
some  relative  pronoun  or  adverb  and  takes  its  verb  in  the 
subjunctive.     See  the  example  above. 

154.  A  relative  clause  of  characteristic  is  used  after  such 
expressions  as : 

Sunt  qui.  There  are  some  who^  etc. 

Solus  est  qui.  He  is  the  only  07ie  who^  etc. : 

There  were  some  who  blamed  Caesar  on  account  of  his 
severity. 

Erant  qui  Caesarem  acerbitatis  incusarent. 

155.  The  ablative,  is  used  to  point  out  that  in  respect  to 
'which  anything  is,  or  is  done  : 

FIRST  LATIN   WRITER  —  6  8  I 


§.§  15^-157]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

They  said  that  the  Bellovaci  were  very  strong  both  in 
valor  and  inflnence  and  niunber  of  men. 

Dixerunt  Bellovacos  plurimum  et  virtute  et  auctoritate 
et  hominum  numero  valere. 

That  is,  they  were  strong  in  respect  to  valor,  etc. 
This  is  called  the  Ablative  of  Specification. 

156.  The  Ablative  of  Means,  instead  of  an  object  in  the 
accusative,  is  used  with  the  verbs  utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior, 
and  vescor : 

Caesar  nsed  the  same  men  as  guides^  who^  etc. 
Caesar  isdem  ducibus  usus  est,  qui,  etc. 

EXAMPLES 

157.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  clauses 
of  characteristic,  account  for  all  subjunctive  tenses,  and 
give  reasons  for  all  the  ablatives : 

1.  There  was  710  i^eserve  which  could  be  sent  as  a 
remforcement. 

Nullum  erat  subsidium  quod  summitti  posset. 

2.  They  gathered  them  together  into  a  place  to  which  there 
was  no  access  on  account  of  the  szvamps. 

Eos  in  eum  locum  coniecerunt,  quo  propter  paludes  aditus 
non  esset. 

3.  This  state  ivas  superior  in  the  number  of  men, 
Haec  civitas  hominum  multitudine  praestabat. 

4.  He  ordered  them  to  use  their  territories  and  towns, 
Suis  finibus  atque  oppidis  uti  iussit. 

5.  There  zvere  some  who  fled. 
Erant  qui  fugerent. 

6.  They  a7'e  the  only  people  who  prevented  the  Cimbri 
from  entering  their  territories. 

Soli  sunt  qui  Cimbros  intra  suos  fines  ingredi  prohibuerint.  • 

82 


A  FIRST   LATIN  WRITER 


[§§  158-159 


158. 

VERBS 

Drive,  compello,  3,  compuli,  com- 

pulsus. 
Excel,  praecedo,  3,  praecessi,  prae- 

cessurus. 
Expose,  nudo,  i . 
Obtain  possession  of,  potior,  4,  po- 

titus  sum. 
Pursue,   persequor,   3,  persecutus 

sum. 
Use,  utor,  uti,  usus. 


VOCABULARY 

NOUNS,   ETC. 

Bravery,  virtus,  virtiitis  (f.). 
Eighth,  octavus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Eleventh,      undecimus,    -a,     -um 

(num.  adj.). 
Embarrassed,  impeditus,   -a,  -um 

(adj.). 
1)1  front,  a  f route. 
Higher,  superior,  superius  (adj.). 
Left,  sinister,   sinistra,  sinistrum 

(adj.). 
Never,  numquam  (adv.). 
Tenth,  decimus,  -a,  -um  (num.  adj.). 
Weak,  infirmus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

COMPOSITION 

159.  When  the  battle  had  begun  the  soldiers  of  the 
tenth  legion,  who  excelled  all  others  in  bravery,  drove  the 
Atrebates  from  the  higher  position  into  the  river.  Then 
they  used  their  swords  and  slew  those  of  the  enemy  who 
were  embarrassed  by  the  water.  The  soldiers  of  the 
eleventh  and  eighth  legion  also  put  to  flight  the  Viro- 
mandui,  who  were  out  of  breath  from  ^running,  and  pur- 
sued them  to  the  river  bank.  There  are  some  who  say 
that  if  the  eleventh  legion  had  not  pursued  the  enemy,  but 
had,  after  putting  the  Viromandui  to  flight,  remained  in 
order  to  serve  as  a  reserve,  the  Nervii  would  never  have 
obtained  possession  of  our  camp.  But  because  the  camp, 
on  account  of  the  departure  of  these  legions,  was  exposed 
on  the  left  and  front,  the  enemy  under  the  leadership  of 
Boduognatus,  who  was  a  most  daring  man,  rushed  against 
these  places  and  reached  the  interior  of  the  camp. 

NOTES,    PHRASES,   ETC. 

I.  Ablative  of  cause. 

83 


§§  i6o-i6i]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

LESSON   XXIII 

The  Accusative  and  Ablative  Classified 

i6o.    I.    Place. 

The  Accusative  is  used  to  express  : 

(a)  Place  to  Which  with  the  prepositions  in,  intOy  or 
ad,  to  : 

Ad  eum  locum.     To  that  place, 
{b)  Extent  of  Space  without  a  preposition : 

He  marched  many  miles. 

Multa  milia  passuum  iter  fecit. 

The  Ablative  is  used  to  express : 

(a)  Place  Where  with  the  preposition  in,  in. 

In  eo  loco.     In  that  place, 
{b)  Place  from  Which  with  the  prepositions  ex  or  ab. 

Ab  eo  loco.     From  that  place. 

Note.  —  Names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  domus,  and  rus,  never 
have  a  preposition,  and  have  a  locative  case  (cf.  29)  for  Place  Where. 

161.    II.    Time. 

The  Accusative  is  used  to  express  : 

Duration  of  Time  without  a  preposition : 
They  were  harassed  for  many  years. 
Exagitati  sunt  multos  annos. 

The  Ablative  is  used  to  express : 
Time  When  without  a  preposition  : 

At  dawn.     Prima  luce. 
Time  Within  Which : 

Within  twenty  days.     Viginti  diebus. 
84 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  162 

162.    III.    Uses  of  the  Ablative. 
The  ablative  is  used  to  express : 

1 .  Accompaniment  with  the  preposition  cum  : 

They  were   m    the   swamps    with   the   women   a7id 

children. 
Cum  pueris  mulieribusque  erant  in  paludibus. 
Note.  —  Cum  is  omitted  in  military  phrases,  e.g.  omnibus  copiis. 

2.  Manner  with  the  preposition  cum : 

They  went  with  great  swiftness. 
Magna  cum  celeritate  ierunt. 
Note.  —  Cum  may  be  omitted  if  there  is  a  limiting  adjective. 

3.  Means  without  a  preposition : 

They  cut  the^n  doivn  with  their  swords, 
Eos  suis  gladiis  occiderunt. 

4.  Agent  after  a  passive  verb  with  the  preposition  a  or  ab : 

He  was  sent  by  Caesar.     Mittebatur  a  Caesare. 

5.  Cause  without  a  preposition  : 

Breathless  from  running.     Exanimatus  cursu. 

6.  Specification : 

A  man  distinguished  for  his  valor, 
Vir  insignis  virtute. 

7.  Quality  with  a  limiting  adjective: 

A  m,an  of  the  greatest  nobility, 
Vir  summa  nobilitate. 
Note.  —  Genitive  would  do  as  well. 

8.  Comparison  without  a  preposition : 

The  Romans  a7'e  bi'aver  than  the  Gauls, 
Romani  fortiores  sunt  Gallis. 
85 


§§  163-164]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

9.    Degree  of  Difference  : 

The  Rhine  is  many  feet  wider  than  the  Rhone. 
Rhenus  latior  multis  pedibus  quam  Rhodanus. 

10.    With  utor,  fruor,  potior,  fungor,  vescor: 
They  used  their  swords.     Gladiis  usi  sunt. 

163.  VOCABULARY 

v^^^s  Sally ^  excursio,  excursionis  (f.). 

Build^    exstruo,    3,   exstruxi,  ex-      Shed.,  vinea,  vineae  (f.). 
structus.  Slow.,  tardus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

NOUNS,  ETC.  ^^  Sreat,  tantus,  -a,  -um  (adj.) . 

Frightened,    permotus,    -a,     -um 

(adj.). 

COMPOSITION 

1 64.  Caesar  came  with  the  greatest  swiftness  and  ordered 
the  soldiers  to  build  a  shed  which  should  be  five  feet  higher 
than  the  enemies'  wall.  The  enemy,  men  of  great  courage, 
thereupon  made  a  sally  from  their  town  in  order  to  try  to 
get  possession  of  the  camp  of  the  Romans.  But  our  men 
rushed  out  of  the  camp  and  attacked  them  with  great  fierce- 
ness, and  although  they  excelled  in  the  number  of  men,  they 
were  soon  put  to  flight  by  our  soldiers,  and  slowly,  on  ac- 
count of  their  wounds,  returned  home  to  their  town.  Then 
the  sheds  were  driven  up  to  the  walls  by  the  hands  of  our 
men,  and  when  these  reached  the  town,  the  townsmen  were 
so  frightened  at  the  sight,  because  those  in  that  town  had 
never  seen  works  of  so  great  size,  that  they  sent  ambassa- 
dors to  Caesar  to  say  that  they  would  surrender  and  would, 
on  the  next  day,  give  up  their  arms ;  that  they  had  fought 
for  many  years,  but  had  never  seen  works  of  such  size,  and 
that  they  therefore  thought  that  the  gods  fought  for  the 
Romans. 

86 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§165-166 

LESSON   XXIV 
Review  of  Lessons  XIV  to  XVII  Inclusive 

165.  Questions  : 

1.  What  is  a  conditional  sentence  ? 

2.  How  many  clauses  are  there  in  a  conditional  sentence  ? 
What  is  each  clause  called  ? 

3.  How  many  kinds  of  condition  are  there  in  Latin  ? 
What  is  each  kind  called  ? 

4.  What  English  words  distinguish  more  vivid  from  less 
vivid  future  conditions  ? 

5.  How  are  the  different  conditions  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

6.  How  does  indirect  discourse  affect  conditions  ? 

7.  Is  there  any  distinction  between  more  vivid  and  less 
vivid  future  conditions  in  indirect  discourse  ? 

8.  What  is  used  for  the  apodosis  in  a  future  condition, 
or  a  contrary  to  fact  condition  in  indirect  discourse  when 
there  is  no  future  participle  of  the  required  verb  ? 

COMPOSITION 

166.  If  the  men  had  not  been  so  crowded  together,  they 
would  have  been  able  to  use  their  swords  more  easily,  but 
the  attack  of  the  enemy  had  been  so  unexpected  that  they 
had  no  time  to  find  the  position  of  their  own  legions,  and  so 
took  their  stand  at  the  first  standards  to  which  they  came. 
Caesar  therefore  commanded  the  centurions  to  open  up  the 
maniples ;  "  for,"  said  he,  ''  if  these  are  opened  up,  the  sol- 
diers will  be  able  to  make  use  of  their  weapons."  Then  a 
messenger  ran  to  Caesar  from  another  part  of  the  line  and 
said  that  Baculus  had  fallen,  and  that,  unless  he  came  with 
reenforcements  to  prevent  it,  the  enemy  would  get  posses- 

87 


§  167]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

sion  of  that  wing  of  the  battle  line.  Caesar  replied  to  this 
that,  if  the  two  legions  in  the  rear  of  the  baggage  were  pres- 
ent, he  would  send  them  as  reenforcements ;  but  because 
these  men  had  not  yet  reached  camp,  there  were  no  reserves 
which  could  be  sent.  "  All  hope  of  safety  stands  in  brav- 
ery alone,"  said  he.  **  If  Baculus  is  dead,  then  I  am  afraid 
^the  matter  is  in  a  critical  state.  I  shall  therefore  come 
and  lead  you,  for  if  the  soldiers  should  see  me  in  danger, 
they  would  fight  bravely  to  preserve  me." 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

I.   A  matter  in  a  critical  state^  res  in  angust5. 


LESSON    XXV 
Review  of  Lessons  XVIII  to  XXIII  Inclusive 

167.    Questions: 

1.  What  sort  of  a  clause  is  a  temporal  clause.?  How 
many  kinds  of  temporal  clauses  are  there  .'^  How  are  they 
expressed  in  Latin  .? 

2.  What  sort  of  a  clause  is  a  causal  clause,  a  concessive 
clause }     How  are  such  clauses  expressed  in  Latin  } 

3.  What  do  you  know  of  the  three  uses  of  cum } 

4.  What  is  an  ablative  absolute  1  When  do  you  use  it  ? 
What  does  it  consist  of  .'^ 

5.  What  is  meant  by  a  relative  clause  of  characteristic.'^ 
How  is  such  a  clause  expressed  in  Latin } 

6.  How  may  comparison  be  expressed  in  Latin.'* 

7.  When  may  you  not  use  the  ablative  of  comparison  ? 

8.  What  do  you  know  of  the  uses  of  the  ablative  and 
accusative  in  connection  with  Time  and  Place  ? 

9.  Give  ten  uses  of  the  ablative  case. 

S8 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  168-169 

168.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS 

Announce^  nuntio,  i.  Cainp  follower^  calo,  calonis  (m.)- 

Despair  of,  despero,  i .  Multitude,    multitude,  multitudi- 

Look  back,  respicio,  3,  respexi,  re-  nis  (f.). 

spectus.  Terrified,  perterritus,-a,  -um  (adj . ) . 

Outnumber,  numero  supero,  i.  Victor^  victor,  victoris,  (m.). 
Plunder,  praedor,  i. 
Press  hard,  premo,  3,  pressi,  pres- 

8US. 

COMPOSITION 

169.  The  camp  followers,  because  they  had  seen  that 
our  men,  as  victors,  had  crossed  the  river,  came  out  of 
camp  to  plunder  the  enemy.  But  when  they  looked  back 
and  saw  that  the  enemy  were  in  our  camp,  they  ^com- 
mitted themselves  to  headlong  flight.  Also,  when  the 
men,  who  were  coming  with  the  baggage,  perceived  the 
enemy,  they  fled,  terrified,  because  they  had  no  weapons. 

2  When  the  camp  followers  had  been  put  to  flight,  ^when 
the  enemy  were  in  possession  of  our  camp,  and  ^the  legions 
hard  pressed,  the  horsemen  of  the  Treviri,  ^  because  they 
despaired  of  our  fortunes,  hastened  home,  and  announced 
to  their  state  that  the  Nervii  were  stronger  than  the  Ro- 
mans both  in  courage  and  number  of  men ;  that  they  out- 
numbered the  Romans  by  ten  thousand  men ;  and  that 
they  had  overwhelmed  Caesar,  although  he  had  used  all 
his  forces  in  the  battle. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1 .  Committed  themselves  to  headlong  flight,  praecipites  f  ugae  sese 
mandabant,  i.e.  headlong  they,  etc. 

2.  Use  ablative  absolute. 


89 


PART    III 


LESSON    XXVI 

Independent  Subjunctives.     Hortatory  and  Optative 
Subjunctive 

I.    What  is  the  Hortatory  Subjunctive  ? 

170.    The  Hortatory  Subjunctive  is  a  main  clause  used 
to  denote : 

1.  Exhortation. 

2.  Command. 

3.  Prohibition  (see  Lesson  XXVII). 

Notes.  —  i.    The  second  person  only  is  used  in  prohibitions. 

2.  The  present  subjunctive  is  generally  used. 

3.  The  negative  of  the  Hortatory  Subjunctive  is  ne. 

EXAMPLES 

Exhortation : 

Let  ns  go  to  the  eamp, 

Eamus  ad  castra. 

Let  lis  not  go  to  the  eamp. 

Ne  ad  castra  eamus. 
Command : 

Let  Labi  cm  IS  do  this. 

Labienus  hoc  faciat. 

For  second  person  in  commands  and  prohibitions,  see  the  next  lesson. 

90 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  171-172 

II.    For  what  is  the  Optative  Subjunctive  used? 

171.  The  Optative  Subjunctive  is  a  main  clause  used  to 
express  a  wish. 

Notes. —  i.  This  subjunctive  is  usually  preceded  hy  utinam.,  wou id 
that^  oh  that^  and  unless  it  is  preceded  by  utinam  the  imperfect  or  plu- 
perfect must  not  be  used. 

2.  The  perfect  subjunctive  is  never  used  in  the  optative  subjunctive. 

3.  The  present  subjunctive  denotes  the  wish  as  possible : 

Oh^  that  our  soldiers  may  be  brave. 
Vtinam  nostri  fortes  sint. 

The  imperfect  denotes  the  wish  as  impossible  of  fulfillment  in  present 

time : 

Wotdd  that  Caesar  were  here. 

Vtinam  Caesar  adesset. 
The  pluperfect  denotes  the  wish  as  unaccomplished  in  past  time : 
Woiddthat  Caesar  had  been  present. 
Vtinam  Caesar  adfuisset. 

Can  not  the  verbs,  volo,  /  wisJi,  nolo,  /  am  nnwillingy 
malo,  I  prefer y  cupio,  /  desire,  etc.,  be  used  to  introduce 
the  expression  of  a  wish  ? 

172.  Volo,  etc.,  may  be  used  to  introduce  the  expression 
of  a  wish. 

These  verbs  take  the  following  construction : 

1.  If  there  is  no  change  of  subject  the  infinitive  is  used  : 

Caesar  wisJied  that  he  had  been  present. 
Caesar  voluit  se  adfuisse. 

2.  If  there  is  a  change  of  subject,  ut  with  subjunctive 
should  be  used. 

We  wished  that  Caesar  had  been  present. 
Voluimus  ut  Caesar  adfuisset. 

Note. — Volo  and  cupio,  however,  can  regularly  take  the  infinitive 
even  when  there  is  a  change  of  subject. 

91 


§§  173-175]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

EXAMPLES 

173.    Account  for  all  the  subjunctives  and  their  tenses 
in  the  following  sentences  : 

1.  Let  us  return  home  and  fight  in  our  own  country. 
Revertamur  domum  et  in  nostris  finibus  decertemus. 

2.  Let  Diviciacus  keep  the  bands  of  the  enemy  apart, 
Diviciacus  manus  hostium  distineat 

3.  Would  that  the  cavalry  had  not  fled  I 
Vtinam  equites  ne  f ugissent ! 

4.  Oh^  that  Labienus  would  look  back  ! 
Vtinam  Labienus  respiciat  I 

5.  Would  that  the  regular  legions  wei^e  here  I 
Vtinam  certae  legiones  adessent ! 

6.  He  wished  to  go  to  those  nations  and  explore  those 
regions, 

Eas  nationes  adire  et  regiones  cognoscere  volebat 

7.  He  wished  that  Labienus  would  return. 
Volebat  ut  Labienus  reverteretur. 

174.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Charge^  signa  infero,  inferre,  in-  Recklessly ^X^^m^t^  (adv.). 

tuli,  inlatus.  Seventh^  septimus,  -a,  -um  (num. 

Come  together^  sese  coniungo,   3,  adj.). 

coniunxi,  coniunctus.  Too  far  ^  paulo  longius. 
Cry  out,  exclamo,  i. 
Die,  morior,  mori,  mortuus  sum. 

COMPOSITION 

175.    Caesar,  when  he  saw  that  the  seventh  legion  was 
hard  pressed  by  the  enemy,  cried  out  to  the  centurions, 

92 


A  FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  176-177 

**  Let  the  legions  come  together  and  charge  the  enemy. 
Let  us  not  fear  that  we  shall  be  surrounded  by  the  Nervii, 
but  let  us  resist  more  bravely  and  fight  more  boldly.  Would 
that  Labienus  would  look  back  and  send  us  reenforcements. 
He  has  pursued  the  Atrebates  too  far,  and  recklessly  wishes 
to  gain  possession  of  the  camp  of  the  enemy.  Would  that 
the  Nervii  would  yield  or  that  the  two  legions,  who  are  in 
the  rear,  would  come  to  help  us !  Let  us  however  be  un- 
willing to  yield,  but  let  us  prefer  to  die  ^  rather  than  be 
conquered." 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC 

I.  Rather  than,  potius  quam. 


LESSON   XXVII 

Imperative.    Commands.    Prohibitions.    Dative  of  Ser- 
vice AND  Double  Dative 

For  what  is  the  imperative  mood  used  1 

176.  The  imperative  mood  is  used  to  express  a  com- 
mand; but: 

177.  A  negative  command,  i.e.  a  prohibition,  is  put  into 
the  hortatory  subjunctive  with  ne,  or  more  usually  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  imperative  of  nolo  (noli,  plural  nolite),  be 
imwilling,  and  the  infinitive ;  sometimes  also  cave,  beware 
of,  with  the  subjunctive  may  be  used. 

Notes.  —  i .  Only  the  second  person  of  the  imperative  is  commonly 
used ;  for  the  third  person  of  command  use  the  Hortatory  Subjunctive. 

2.  The  present  imperative  is  mainly  used.  If  there  is  a  distinct 
reference  to  future  time  the  future  imperative  may  be  rarely  used. 

93 


§§  178-179]  A-  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

EXAMPLES 

In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  imperatives  and 
subjunctives  and  give  the  reasons  for  their  use  : 

1.  Jump  dozvHj  fellow-soldiers^  unless  you  wish  to  Jiand 
over  tJie  eagle  to  the  enemy. 

Desilite  commilitones,  nisi  vultis  aquilam  hostibus  pro- 
dere ! 

2.  Do  not  hand  over  the  eagle  to  the  eiiemy. 

Uolite  aquilam  hostibus  prodere;  (or)  Ne  prodatis  aquilam 
hostibus ;  (or)  Cavete  aquilam  hostium  prodatis. 

3.  Send  Labie7ius  to  Caesar  to-moi^row, 
Cras  mittito  ad  Caesarem  Labienum. 

What  is  the  effect  of  indirect  discourse  upon  the  horta- 
tory subjunctive  and  the  imperative? 

178.  In  indirect  discourse  the  imperative  is  changed 
into  the  subjunctive,  and  the  hortatory  subjunctive  remains 
in  the  subjunctive. 

In  indirect  discourse  prohibitions  are  always  in  the  sub- 
junctive with  ne.     Noli  and  cave  must  not  be  used. 

1.  Precatur  commilitones  desiliant  nisi  velint  aquilam 
hostibus  prodere. 

2.  Precatur  ne  aquilam  hostibus  prodant. 

3.  Precatur  cras  Labienum  ad  Caesarem  mittat. 

179.  Dative  of  Service  or  Purpose. 

The  dative  is  used  to  show  that  for  which  something 
serves :       . 

The  horsemen  came  as  a  reenforcemejit. 

Equites  auxilio  venerunt,  i.Q.for  a  help. 
94 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  180-181 

This  dative  is  most  frequently  used  in  what  has  been  aptly  called 
the  Double  Dative  construction;  that  is,  where  the  person  or  thing 
that  is  benefited  or  hampered  by  the  service  is  also  in  the  dative : 

The  soldier's  were  a  guard  to  the  baggage. 

Milites  praesidio  impedimentis  erant,  i.e.  served  for  a  guard  to  .  .  . 

He  saw  that  they  hindered  one  another  iii  fighting. 

Ipsos  sibi  esse  ad  pugnam  impedimento  vidit. 

180.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS 

Drive  out,   expello,  3,  expuli,  ex-  Disgrace,    turpitiido,   turpitudinis 

pulsus.  (f.). 

Set  free^  to  free,  libero,  i.  Return^  reditus,  -us  (m.). 
Wipe  otit,  deleo,  2,  delevi,  deletus. 

COMPOSITION 

181.  Labienus  looked  back  and  saw  that  Caesar  was 
hard  pressed.  He  therefore  sent  the  tenth  legion  as  a 
help  to  Caesar.  ''  Go  with  great  swiftness,"  he  com- 
manded, ''free  the  general  from  danger,  and  drive  out 
the  Nervii  from  the  camp.  Do  not  delay,  but  run  ^at  full 
speed.  Do  not  let  the  enemy  have  the  victory,  but  show 
2 your  usual  courage  and  the  battle  will  be  yours."  The 
leader  of  our  horse  said  that  the  cavalry  had  been  put  to 
flight,  but  that  if  the  tenth  legion  should  return  the  cavalry 
were  also  to  run  back  and  help  Caesar;  that  they  were 
not  to  be  afraid  to  return,  but  were  to  go  and  wipe  out  the 
disgrace  of  their  flight  by  their  valor. 

When  these  reenforcements  arrived,  the  attack  of  the 
enemy  was  checked,  and  they  were  driven  out  of  the  camp 
of  the  Romans. 

PHRASES 

1 .  At  full  speed,  incitato  cursu. 

2 .  Vour  usual  courage,  vestram  virtutem. 

95 


§§  182-184]  A    FIRST    LATIxN    WRITER 

LESSON    XXVIII 
Direct  Questions.     Dative  of  Possession 

In  what  mood  is  a  direct  question  ? 

182.  A  direct  question  is  ordinarily  in  the  indicative 
mood. 

NOTES.  —  I .  A  simple  question  has  usually  the  enclitic  -ne  added  to 
the  emphatic  word : 

Is  Caesar  in  the  camp  ? 
Estne  Caesar  in  castris  ? 

2.  A  question  which  expects  the  answer  "  yes  "  is  introduced  by  the 
negative  nonne,  is  not  f 

Is  not  Caesar  a  skillful  general? 
Nonne  Caesar  dux  peritus  est  ? 

3.  A  question  which  expects  the  answer  '^  no  "  is  introduced  by  num  : 

The  Gauls  did  not  conquer  the  Romans^  did  they  ? 
Num  Galli  Romanos  superaverunt  ? 

What  is  a  double  question } 

183.  A  double  question  is  one  that  asks  which  of  two 
supposed  cases  is  the  true  one.  In  Latin  the  first  case 
is  usually  preceded  by  utrum,  whether,  and  the  second  by 
an,  or: 

Are  the  Romans  or  the  Gauls  the  braver  f 
Utrum  Romani  an  Galli  f ortiores  sunt  ? 

184.  Questions  are  also  introduced  by  interrogative  par- 
ticles. 

The  most  usual  of  these  are : 

I.    The  pronouns : 

Quis  ?  quae  ?  quid  ?     who  ?  which  ?  what  ? 

96 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  185-186 

2.  Pronominal  adjectives : 

Quantus,  -a,  -um  ?  how  great  ? 
Quails,  -q'^  of  what  sort  ? 

3.  Interrogative  adverbs : 

Vbl  ?  when  ?  Vnde  ?  whence  ? 

Quo?  whither?  Quot ?  hozv  many ? 

Qua  ?  where  ?  Vtrum  ?  whether  ? 

4.  The  adjective: 

Vter,  utra,  utrum,  which  (of  two)  ? 

185.    The  dative  is  used  with  the  verb  sum,  to  denote 

possession  : 

Merchants  have  no  access  to  them. 

NuUus  adltus  est  ad  eos  mercatoribus,  i,e,  there  Is  no 
admission  for  merchants. 

186.     EXAMPLES 

1 .  What  sort  of  states  are  they  ? 
Quales  civltates  sunt  ? 

2.  Is  Labieniis  zvith  Caesar  f 
Estne  Lablenus  cum  Caesare  ? 

3.  Did  not  the  soldiers  have  weapons  ? 
Nonne  arma  mllltlbus  erant  ? 

4.  The   Treviri  did  not  say  that  Caesar  had  conquered 
the  Nervii,  did  they  ? 

Num*  Treviri  dicebant  Caesarem  Nervlos  superavisse  ? 

5.  Whither  are  you  going?     Quo  vadls  ? 

FIRST   LATIN    WRITER — 7  97 


§§  187-189]  A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

187.    .VOCABULARY 
NOUNS,  ETC. 

Hindrance,  impeditum,  -i  (n.).  Merchants,  mercator,  mercatoris 

Question,  quaestio,  quaestionis  (f.).  (^'n.)* 

Why  f  quid  ? 

COMPOSITION 

188.  Caesar  before  the  battle  had  asked  the  Haedui 
these  questions :  "  What  sort  of  people  are  the  Nervii  ? 
How  great  are  their  resources?  Why  do  the  merchants 
have  no  access  to  them  ?  How  many  soldiers  have  they  ? 
Do  they  intend  to  take  their  stand  on  this  side  of  the  river, 
or  will  they  not  rather  cross  the  river  and  there  await  my 
coming  ?  Whither  will  they  flee  if  they  are  conquered  ?  '* 
The  Haedui  had  at  this  time  answered  that  the  Nervii 
were  the  bravest  men  in  Gaul ;  that  they  were  unwilHng 
that  the  merchants  should  bring  them  wine;  that  they 
would  await  Caesar's  arrival  on  the  other  side  of  the  river. 

LESSON    XXIX 

Indirect  Questions.     Partitive  Genitive 

What  is  the  difference  between  direct  and  indirect  ques- 
tions ? 

189.  A  direct  question  gives  the  exact  words  of  the 
question : 

Is  Caesar  in  the  camp  ? 
But  in  an  indirect  question  the  words  of  the  questioner  are 
quoted : 

He  asks  if  Caesar  is  in  the  camp. 

Note.  —  The  Latins  extended  the  idea  of  indirect  question  to  such 
an  extent,  that  wherever  an  interrogative  word  (see  184)  is  used,  though 
there  may  have  been  no  direct  question,  the  indirect  question  construc- 
tion follows. 

98 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  [§§  190-192 

What  is  the  construction  of  an  indirect  question  ? 

190.  An  indirect  question  is  introduced  by  some  inter- 
rogative particle,  is  put  into  the  subjunctive  mood,  and  its 
tense  depends  on  the  following  rules  : 

1.  If  the  time  of  the  indirect  question  is  present,  use 
the  present  subjunctive. 

2.  If  the  time  of  the  indirect  question  is  past  and  the 
introducing  verb  is  primary,  use  the  perfect  subjunctive. 

3.  If  the  introducing  verb  is  secondary,  use  the  im- 
perfect subjunctive  for  repeated  action,  the  pluperfect  for 
completed  action. 

EXAMPLES 

He  asks  what  I  am  doing.     Rogat  quid  f  aciat. 
He  asks  what  I  did.     Rogat  quid  fecerit. 
He  asked  what  I  was  doing.     RogSvit  quid  facerem. 
He  asked  what  I  had  done.     Rogavit  quid  f ecissem. 

4.  If  the  time  indicated  by  the  indirect  question  is 
future,  then  a  paraphrase  must  be  used,  consisting  of  the 
future  participle,  and  the  proper  person  of  sim,  if  the  in- 
troducing verb  is  primary,  and  of  essem,  if  the  introducing 
verb  is  secondary : 

He  asks  what  I  shall  do.     Rogat  quid  facturus  sim. 

He  asked  what  I  should  do,     Rogavit  quid  facturus  essem. 

191.  The  whole  to  which  a  part  belongs  is  denoted  by 
the  genitive. 

Part  of  the  soldiers^  pars  militum. 

EXAMPLES 

192.  In  the  following  sentences  give  reasons  for  all  sub- 
junctives and  their  tenses  : 

99 


§  193]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

1.  When  he  asked  what  states  there  were,  how  powerful 
they  were^  and  what  they  could  do  in  war,  he  found  out,  etc. 

Cum  quaereret  quae  civitates,  quantaeque  in  armis  essent, 
et  quid  in  bello  possent,  reperiebat,  etc. 

2.  Because  they  knew  how  great  a  calamity  they  had 
brought  upon  their  state,  etc. 

Quod  intellegerent  quantam  calamitatem  civitati  intulis- 
sent,  etc. 

3.  Caesar  asks  why  Labienus  does  not  come. 
Caesar  rogat  qua  de  causa  Labienus  non  veniat. 

4.  He  did  not  know  whether  the  reenforcements  woicldcome. 
Non  scivit  utrum  subsidia  ventura  essent. 

COMPOSITION 

193.  Caesar  before  the  battle  had  asked  the  Haedui 
what  sort  of  people  the  Nervii  were,  how  powerful  they 
were  in  arms,  and  how  many  states  had  conspired  with 
them.  He  wished  at  that  time  also  to  know  whether  the 
enemy  would  await  his  arrival  on  this  side  of  the  river, 
or  would  go  across  it.  He  knew  what  the  surrendered 
Gauls  had  told  the  Nervii,  and  therefore  wished  to  find 
out  where  to  expect  the  attack  of  this  tribe.  The  Haedui 
at  that  time  had  answered,  that  the  Nervii  were  the 
bravest  men  in  Gaul ;  that  they  had  collected  together  all 
of  their  fighting  men  because  they  knew  how  powerful  the 
Romans  were  in  war;  that  it  would  therefore  be  some 
^  trouble  to  conquer  them,  especially  because  each  one  of 
the  tribe  knew  what  he  was  doing  when  he  had  consented 
to  fight  against  the  Romans. 

PHRASES,   NOTES,   ETC 

I.    Trouble^  partitive  genitive,  i.e.  something  of  trouble. 

Note.  —  Review  Lesson  XXXV  may  be  studied  here. 

100 


A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER  [§§  194-19S 

LESSON   XXX 

Periphrastic  Conjugations.     Dative  of  Agent 

What  are  the  periphrastic  conjugations  and  when  are 
they  used? 

194.  There  are  two  periphrastic  conjugations. 

I.  The  first  periphrastic  conj ugation  consists  of  the  future 
participle  of  the  verb  required,  with  some  tense  of  the  verb 
sum,  meaning :  ^  -^  o\ .    '.  • 

be  about  to  .  .  .     ,    '     '  ' 

be  on  the  point  of;  .^  v,\  i     I  i»  »'  '>  L*  l\l  I 

He  is  about  to  die.     Moriturus  est. 

He  was  about  to  die.     Moriturus  erat,  etc. 

NOTES 

1 .  We  have  already  studied  four  uses  of  this  periphrastic  conjugation : 

(a)  The  future  infinitive  in  indirect  discourse.     See  17. 
{b)  The  future  condition  in  indirect  discourse.     See  112  and  113. 
(c)  Contrary  to  fact  condition  in  indirect  discourse.     See  118  and 
119. 

{d)  Future  indirect  question.     See  190,  4. 

2.  This  conjugation  is  most  frequently  used  in  the  infinitive. 

195.  II.  The  second  periphrastic  conjugation  consists 
of  the  gerundive  and  some  tense  of  the  verb  sum,  and  de- 
notes what  must,  should,  or  ought  to  be  done : 

All  things  must  be  done  by  Caesar.  Omnia  Caesari  agenda 
sunt. 

All  things  should  have  been  dojie  by  Caesar.  Omnia 
Caesari  agenda  erant. 

All  things  will  have  to  be  done  by  Caesar,  Omnia  Caesari 
agenda  erunt. 

lOI 


§§  196-197]  A    FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 

196.  After  the  gerundive,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  the 
agent  with  a  or  ab,  we  must  use  the  dative  of  the  agent. 
See  Ca,esari,  in  the  examples  above. 

EXAMPLES 

197.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  first  and 
second  periphrastic  conjugations  and  account  for  the 
datives : 

1.  They  thought  that  the  Romans  had  no  knowledge  of 
'tJiie^shoah^n  ih^a^ids  of  those  places  where  they  were  about 
,  tojwag^.^W<^t'   .*''", 

4)kigtilnafeant'febtlianos  eorum  locorum  ubi  bellum  gesturi 
essent,  neque  vada  neque  insulas  novisse. 

2.  He  said  that  he  would  do  that  which  lie  had  done  in 
the  case  of  the  Nervii. 

Dixit  se  id  quod  in  Nerviis  fecisset  facturum  esse. 

3.  They  had  thought  that  our  men  would  draw  off  the 
guard  or  would  keep  it  carelessly, 

Illi  nostros  praesidia  deducturos  aut  indiligentius  serva- 
turos  crediderant. 

4.  He  keeps  apart  the  bands  of  the  enemy  so  that  he  may 
not  have  to  fight  with  so  great  a  multitude  at  one  time. 

Mantis  hostium  distinet  ne  cum  tanta  multitudine  sibi 
uno  tempore  confligendum  sit. 

5.  The  Nervii  thought  that  the  plan  ought  not  to  be  dis- 
regarded by  them. 

Non  omittendum  sibi  consilium  Nervii  existimaverunt. 

6.  The  signal  had  to  be  given  on  the  trumpet, 

Signum  tuba  dandum  erat. 

102 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  198-199 

198.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,   ETC. 

Gather^  confero,  3,  contuli,  conla-      Mound,  agger,  aggeris  (m.). 

tus.  Sight,  visus,  visus  (m.). 

Laugh  at,  inrideo,  2,  inrisi,  inrisus.       7>rr2/?^<3f, perterritus, -a, -um  (adj.). 
Withdraw,   se  recipio,   3,   recepi, 

receptus. 

COMPOSITION 

199.  Caesar  was  about  to  return  into  the  province  when 
he  heard  that  the  Aduatuci  had  gathered  all  their  forces 
into  one  town,  and  there  awaited  the  coming  of  the  Ro- 
mans. He  thought  therefore  that  he  ^  ought  to  conquer 
this  tribe  before  he  went  home. 

On  his  arrival  the  Aduatuci  were  about  to  attack  him, 
when  they  became  afraid  and  withdrew  into  the  town,  in 
order  that  they  ^  might  not  have  to  fight  with  Caesar. 

Therefore  sheds  had  to  be  built,  a  tower  had  to  be  con- 
structed, and  a  mound  thrown  up  by  the  Romans,  in  order 
that  they  might  take  the  town  by  storm. 

2  When  these  things  had  been  done,  the  Aduatuci  were 
on  the  point  of  laughing  at  the  Romans  because  they  had 
built  so  great  engines  of  war  ^at  so  great  a  distance; 
but  when  they  saw  that  the  tower  and  sheds  were  mov- 
ing toward  their  walls,  terrified  at  the  sight,  they  thought 
that  they  ^  ought  to  send  ambassadors  to  Caesar  to  ask 
for  peace.  When  Caesar  had  listened  to  these  men,  he 
said  that  hostages  must  be  sent  to  him  and  that  all  the 
arms  must  be  handed  over. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,  ETC. 

1.  Use  the  gerundive. 

2.  Ablative  Absolute. 

3.  At  so  great  a  distance,  tanto  spati5. 

103 


§§  200-20I]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

LESSON   XXXI 

Participles  and  Gerund 

The  participles  are : 

Present  Active.  Perfect  Passive. 

Future  Active.  Gerundive. 

200.  The  future  active  participle,  as  v^e  have  seen,  is 
usually  used  in  the  periphrastic  conjugation.  It  remains, 
therefore,  to  study  the  use  of  the  other  three. 

201.  I.  The  present  and  perfect  participles  may  be  used 
in  agreement  with  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb  instead 
of  a  subordinate  clause  to  denote  : 

1.  Time. 

2.  Cause. 

3.  Attending  circumstance  of  an  action. 

4.  Condition. 

EXAMPLES 

1.  Time: 

When  they  had  delayed  a  little  near  the  town  and  had 
laid  waste  the  fields  of  tJie  Remi^  they  hastened  to  Caesar  s 
camp. 

Paulisper  apud  oppidum  morati,  agrosque  Remorum  de- 
populati,  ad  castra  Caesaris  contenderunt. 

He  came  upon  them  while  they  were  fighting, 
Eis  pugnantibus  occurrit. 

2.  Cause : 

The  horsemen  of  the  Treviri,  because  they  were  terrified 
by  all  these  things^  hastened  home. 

Quibus  omnibus  rebus  permoti  equites  Treviri  domum 
contenderunt. 

104 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  202-203 

3.  Attendant  circumstance : 

The  women,  holding  out  their  hands,  sought  peace  from 
the  Romans. 

Mulieres,  passis   manibus,  pacem  ab  Romanis  petierunt. 

4.  Condition : 

He  said  that  if  he  were  asked  he  would  encourage  the 
soldiers. 

Dixit  se  rogatum  milites  cohortatiirum  esse. 

202.  II.  The  present  and  perfect  participles  are  often 
used  like  adjectives. 

The  m.ind  of  the  enem^y  was  so  set  upon  fighting  that,  etc. 

Hostium  tarn  paratus  ad  dimicandum  erat  animus  ut,  etc. 

They  had  minds  of  very  little  stability. 

Animos  minime  resistentes  habuerunt. 

Note.  —  There  is  no  active  perfect  participle,  and  therefore  this  defi- 
ciency is  made  good  by  a  temporal  clause,  or  by  an  ablative  absolute. 
See  148,  2.  But  a  deponent  verb  having  an  active  meaning  and  a  per- 
fect participle  has  a  form  which  corresponds  in  meaning  to  the  English 
perfect  participle  active. 

Having  said  this,  he  returned  to  camp. 
His  dictis  (or  cum  haec  dixisset)  se  ad  castra  recepit. 
But: 

Havi7ig  encouraged  the  soldiers,  he  returned  to  camp, 
Cohortatus  milites  se  ad  castra  recepit. 

203.  The  gerundive  is  used  : 

1.  In  the  periphrastic  conjugation.     See  194. 

2.  As  an  adjective. 

He  gave  the  signal  for  beginning  battle. 
Signum  committendi  proelii  dedit. 

3.  With  ad  to  denote  purpose.     See  50. 

los 


§§  204-206]  A    FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

204.     Gerund  is : 

1.  Used  with  ad  to  denote  purpose.     See  50. 

2.  A  noun  and  may  be  used  as  one  in  its  cases. 

If  a  beginning  of  crossing  should  be  made  by  them. 
Si  ab  illis  initium  transeundi  fieret. 


205.     VOCABULARY 


NOUNS 


Beginnings  initium,  i  (n.).  Deprive^  despolio,  i,  with  ablative. 

Safety^  salus,  salutis  (f.). 

COMPOSITION 

Note. — In  this  composition  translate  the  temporal,  causal,  condi- 
tional, and  attendant  circumstance  clauses  by  a  participle. 

206.  Caesar  when  he  had  encouraged  his  men  gave  the 
signal  for  beginning  battle.  Because  the  mind  of  the 
enemy  was  not  ^  set  upon  fighting,  they  were  soon  repulsed 
and  driven  back  into  their  town.  Then,  sending  ambassa- 
dors to  Caesar,  they  say  that  they  will  surrender,  and  ask 
him  not  to  deprive  them  ^  of  their  arms.  '*  For,"  say  they, 
"  if  our  arms  are  taken  away,  we  shall  be  unable  to  defend 
ourselves  from  our  enemies."  The  ambassadors  receive 
this  reply  from  Caesar,  that  he  will  receive  their  surrender, 
when  their  arms  are  handed  over  to  him,  but  that  he  will 
grant  no  terms  of  surrender  unless  they  give  up  their  arms. 
Therefore  the  Aduatuci,  because  they  see  no  hope  of  safety, 
surrendering  their  arms,  accept  Caesar's  terms. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1 .  Set  tipon,  paratus  ad. 

2.  Of  their  arms^  armis,  ablative  after  despolio. 


106 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  207-210 

LESSON    XXXII 
Some  Uses  of  the  Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses 

207.  In  expressions  of  duration  of  time  the  present  tense 
is  used  when  an  action  is  denoted,  which,  begun  in  the 
past,  is  continued  in  the  present.  Such  clauses  are  most 
frequently  introduced  by,  iam  diu,  iam  dudum,  etc. : 

Caesar  has  fought  with  the  Gauls  foi'  a  long  thne. 

Jam  diu  Caesar  cum  Gallis  pugnat. 
But : 

If  the  action  to  be  denoted  was  begun  in  and  continued 
in  past  time,  the  imperfect  is  used  : 

Caesar  had  fought  with  the  Gauls  for  a  long  time, 

Caesar  iam  diu  cum  Gallis  contendebat. 

208.  Dum,  meaning  while,  is  used  in  the  present  indica- 
tive, where  the  English  usually  has  the  imperfect : 

While  these  things  were  going  on,  Caesar  was  in  Gaul. 
Dum  haec  geruntur,  Caesar  in  Gallia  erat. 

209.  The  imperfect  usually  denotes  continued  or  re- 
peated action : 

Many  irports  were  brought  to  him,  and  he  was  continu- 
ally inforrned  by  the  letters  of  Labienus  that  all  the  Bel- 
gians were  conspiring. 

Crebri  ad  eum  rumores  adferebantur,  litterisque  Labieni 
certior  fiebat  omnis  Belgas  inter  se  coniurare. 

EXAMPLES 

210.  Account  for  the  use  of  the  present  and  imperfect 
in  the  following  sentences  : 

107 


§§  2II-2I2]  A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 

1.  Now  for  many  years  the  Gauls  had  desired  new  forms 
of  government, 

Galli  iam  multos  annos  novis  imperils  studebant. 

2.  For  a  long  time  the  Gauls  have  desired  new  forms  of 
government. 

Iam  diu  Galli  novis  imperils  student. 

3.  While  the  tenth  legion  was  pursuing  the  Atrebates,  the 
Nervii  gained  possession  of  our  camp, 

Dum  legio  decima  Atrebates  prosequuntur,  Nervii  nostris 
castris  potiebantur. 

4.  They  kept  on  pursuing  the  enemy  for  many  miles, 
Hostes  multa  milia  passuum  prosequebantur. 

211.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS 

Break  in,  refringo,  3,  refregi,  re-      Fortification,       munitio,       muni- 

fractus.  tionis  (f.). 

Keep  within,  se  contineo,  2,  con-      Gate,  porta,  -ae  (f.). 

tinui,  contentus.  Redoubt,  cdistQWumy -i  {n.). 

Sell,  vendo,  3,  vendidi,  venditus. 
Throw  back,  reicio,  3,  reieci,  re- 

iectus. 

COMPOSITION 

212.  The  Aduatuci  had  for  a  long  time  kept  within  the 
town,  so  that  Caesar  thought  that  they  had  accepted  the 
terms  of  peace.  But  suddenly,  while  our  men  were  in 
camp,  they  made  a  sally  against  that  part  of  our  fortifica- 
tions which  seemed  the  weakest.  Our  men  ran  out  quickly 
from  the  nearest  redoubts  in  order  to  repel  the  attack,  and 
fought  with  the  enemy  for  many  hours  in  that  place.  At 
length,  ^  when  many  thousands  of  them  had  been  killed, 

108 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  213-216 

the  enemy  were  thrown  back  into  the  town.  On  the  next 
day,  ^  when  the  gates  had  been  broken  into,  while  our  men 
were  marching  into  the  town,  their  senate  came  to  Caesar 
and  kept  on  asking  him  to  preserve  them.  But  to  these 
Caesar  said,  '*  Now  for  a  long  time  you  have  resisted  me, 
and  have-kept  me  here  for  many  days,  when  I  ^  ought  to 
have  been  in  the  province,  and  also  you  have  attacked  me 
after  you  had  surrendered ;  therefore  I  shall  sell  you  and 
the  whole  town." 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

1 .  Translate  by  ablative  absolute. 

2.  Oportet  with  infinitive. 


LESSON   XXXIII 

Uses  of  the  Genitive 

213.  The  genitive  is  the  case  of  the  possessor. 
Caesar's  army.     Exercitus  Caesaris. 

214.  The  genitive  is  used  with  an  adjective  to  describe 
the  peculiar  quality  of  some  one  or  some  thing. 

A  man  of  great  courage.     Vir  magnae  virtutis. 

215.  The  genitive  is  used  to  describe  the  material  of 
which  a  thing  consists  or  is  made. 

A  hedge  of  boughs,     Saepes  ramorum. 

216.  The  whole  to  which  a  part  belongs  is  denoted  by 
the  partitive  genitive. 

Part  of  the  foot  soldiers.     Pars  peditum. 

No  distance,  nothing  of  distance.     Nihil  spatii. 

109 


§§  21 7-218]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

217.  The  subjective  genitive  is  used  when,  if  there  was 
a  predicate,  the  genitive  would  be  the  subject. 

A  father's  love.     Amor  patris. 
Here,  if  there  were  a  predicate, /^///^r  would  be  subject, 
e.g.  the  love  which  the  father  feels. 

218.  The  objective  genitive  is  used  after : 

1.  Nouns  that  have  a  transitive  sense. 

The  horsemen  of  the  Treviri^  whose  reputation  for  valory  etc. 
Equites  Treviri,  quorum  opinio  virtutis,  etc. 
Thanksgiving  to  the  gods.     Supplicatio  deorum. 
Desire  for  power.     Cupiditas  regni. 

2.  Verbs  and  adjectives  of  : 
{a)   Memory  and  forgetfulness. 
Mindful  of  his  former  valor. 
Suae  pristinae  virtutis  memor. 

If  he  shotdd  consent  to  disregard  the  old  affront. 
Si  veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci  vellet. 
(^)   Power  or  weakness. 
Able  to  rule.     Potens  imperii. 
A  race  having  no  control  of  its  own  affairs. 
Gens  impotens  suarum  rerum. 
{c)   Knowledge  or  ignorance. 

Our  men  were  altogether  unacquainted  with  this  kind  of 
fighting. 

Nostri  huius  omnino  generis  pugnae  imperiti  erant. 

If  the  Roman  people  had  been  aware  of  any  harm  doings 
etc. 
Si  Romaniis  populus  alicuius  iniuriae  conscius,  etc. 

no 


A   FIRST  LATIN   WRITER  [§§  219-220 

{d)   Innocence  or  guilt. 

Guiltless  of  his  brother's  death. 

Insons  fraterni  sanguinis. 

Guilty  of  conspiracy.     Noxius  coniurationis. 

{/)   Charge  or  penalty,  after  verbs  of  condemnation  or 
acquittal. 

Vercingetorix  was  accused  of  treachery. 

Vercingetorix  proditionis  insimulatus  est. 

He  was  condemned  to  death. 

Capitis  damnatus  est. 

219.    The  genitive  also  follows  certain  words : 

Causa  and  gratia, /6?r  the  sake  of,  e.g.  hiemandi  causa,  to 
winter. 

Instar,  like,  e.g.  saepes  instar  muri,  a  hedge  like  a  wall. 

Postridie,  day  after,  e.g.  postridie  eius  diei,  the  day  after 
that  day. 

220.  VOCABULARY 

VERBS  Desirous,  cupidus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Accuse,  incuso,  i.  ^''^y^  ^^^^^«^'  '^  ("•)• 

Condemn,  damn5,  i.  ^'^^^^^^^  pristinus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Disregard,  be  forgetful  of  obli-  ^^''^<^'  °^^^"«'  "*'  """^  (^^iO- 

viscor,  3,  oblitus  sum.  Mindful     of     memor,    memoris 
Leave,  relinquo,  3,  reliqui,  relictus.  (^"J-)- 

Be  in  possession  of  potior,  4,  poti-  Reputation,  opinio,  opinionis  (f.). 

tus  sum,  with  genitive.  ^^^^'  ^^^^"^  "^  C^-)- 

Sagacity,  consilium,  -i  (n.). 

Some  .  .    .  others,   alii  .  .  .  alii. 


-IS,    -e 


NOUNS,   ETC. 

Treachery, 

proditio,     p 

The  chief  command,  summa  im- 

(f.). 

peri. 

Unequaled, 

singularis. 

Desire,  cupiditas,  cupiditatis  (f.). 

(adj.). 
Ill 

221-222]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


COMPOSITION 


221.  On  the  day  after  that  day,  Caesar,  thinking  that 
he  was  in  possession  of  all  Gaul,  departed  for  the  province 
with  the  desire  for  rest.  He  took  some  of  the  soldiers 
with  him  and  left  the  others  with  Labienus,  —  a  man  of 
the  greatest  sagacity,  and  ^  one  who  had  an  unequalled  repu- 
tation for  valor, — because  he  was  desirous  of  the  chief 
command.  On  the  day  of  his  departure,  Caesar  had  ad- 
dressed the  soldiers,  saying,  that  he  hoped  that  they, 
2  during  his  absence,  would  be  mindful  of  their  duty 
^toward  him  and  Labienus,  and  that,  if  they  were  at- 
tacked, they  would  not  be  forgetful  of  their  former  valor ; 
that  he  hoped  also  that  none  of  them  would  be  guilty  of 
treachery,  and  that  if  any  one  was  accused  of  this  crime, 
he  would  condemn  him  to  death. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC 

1.  (9;/^  w-^^,  qui  (characteristic). 

2.  During  his  absence^  eo  absente. 

3.  Towards  him,  dative. 


LESSON   XXXIV 

Uses  of  the  Dative 

222.    The   dative   is  the  case   of   the  object  indirectly 
affected  by  the  action  of  a  verb : 

He  gives  a  book  to  the  boy  or  He  gives  the  boy  a  book. 

In  this  sentence  book  is  the  direct  object  and  boy  the 
indirect,  and  therefore  dative. 

Librum  puero  dat. 

112 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  223-224 

Also : 

He  answered  AriovisUis,  i.e.  He  answered  to  Ariovistus  : 

Ariovisto  respondit. 

Note.  —  If,  however,  motion  is  expressed,  the  accusative  with  ad  or 
in  must  be  used ;  see  12  : 

He  sent  Labzenus  to  Caesar, 
Labienum  ad  Caesarem  misit. 

223.  The  verbs  of  most  common  use  that  take  the  dative 
of  indirect  object  are  :  — 

I. 

Credo,  /  believe y  I  trust  i7t :  He  trusted  Caesar^  Caesari 
credidit. 

Ignosco,  /  pardon:  He  pardoned  the  Bellovaci,  Bel- 
lovacis  ignovit. 

Impero,  I  command:  He  commanded  hi^n,  ei  imperavit. 

Parco,  /  spare  :  He  spared  the  women,  mulieribus  pepercit. 

Pareo,  /  obey :  He  obeyed  Caesar ,  Caesari  paruit. 

Persuadeo,  /  persuade :  He  persuades  Diviciacus,  Divi- 
ciaco  persuadet. 

Resisto,  /  withstand:  He  withstood  the  enemy ^  hostibus 
restitit. 

Studeo,  /  desire:  He  desires  new  government^  novis 
rebus  studet. 

And  others. 

224.  II.  Verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  in, 
inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  are  followed  by  the 
dative  of  the  indirect  object  if  the  meaning  of  the  com- 
pound requires : 

Titurius  was  in  command  of  the  redoubt, 

Titurius  castello  praeerat. 
But: 

FIRST  LATIN  WRITER  —  8  113 


§§  225-226]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

Fear  took  possession  of  tJieir  minds, 
Timor  animos  praeoccupavit. 

Then  the  difficulty  is  to  know  when  to  use  the  dative  and  when  not. 

A  useful  rule,  although  it  has  many  exceptions,  is  that  if  in  the  Eng- 
lish the  compound  verb  is  divided  into  a  verb  and  a  preposition,  then 
use  the  dative,  otherwise  not : 

The  redoubt  over  which  Tituriiis  presided  was  behind  the  cainp. 

Post  castra  erat  castellum  cui  Titurius  praeerat. 
But: 

They  confessed  their  sins.     Delicta  confess!  sunt. 

225.  Adjectives  that  take  the  dativ€  are  those  of: 

1.  Nearness: 

The  Senones  were  the  neighbors  of  the  Belgae, 
Senones  finitimi  Belgis  erant. 

2.  Likeness : 

The  setting  out  ivas  very  7nuch  like  a  flight, 
Profectio  consimilis  fugae  erat. 

3.  Fitness : 

A  place  suitable  for  a  camp. 
Locus  idoneus  castris. 

226.  Dative  with  nouns. 

1.  Dative  of  service  : 

They  came  as  an  aid  to  the  soldiers. 
Multibus  auxilio  venerunt. 

2.  Dative  of  agent  after  the  gerundive: 
All  things  had  to  be  done  by  Caesar. 
Omnia  Caesari  agenda  erant. 

3.  Dative  of  possession  with  sum  : 
The  merchants  had  no  access  to  them. 
Eis  aditus  mercatoribus  non  erat. 

114 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  227-228 

227.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS 

Be  desirous  of,  studeo,  2,  studui,      Beastofbterden,mmQTi.tvLm,-\(n.). 

,  with  dative.  Character,  natura,  -ae  (f.). 

Betray,  prodo,  3,  prodidi,  proditus.       Conqueror,  victor,  victoris  (m.)- 
Obey,  be  obedient  to,  pared,  2.  Fickle,  instabilis,  -e  (adj.). 

Pardon,  ignosco,  3,  ignovi,  ignotus,      Fitted,  suited,  aptus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

,  with  dative.  Fitted,     suited,     idoneus,  -a,  -um 

Preside  over,   praesum,  praeesse,  (adj.). 

praefui. 
Resist,    withstand,   resisto,  3,  re- 

stiti, ,  with  dative. 

Spare,    pared,     3,    peperci, , 

with  dative. 

COMPOSITION 

228.  The  Gauls  are  men  of  fickle  mind,  who  are  always 
desirous  of  new  governments.  They  do  not  easily  obey  a 
conqueror,  and  will  only  follow  one  of  their  own  leaders,  if 
he  is  able  to  persuade  them  to  do  what  he  commands  them. 
They  will  withstand  an  enemy  bravely  until  they  are  over- 
whelmed, and  then,  if  they  surrender,  and  the  victor  spares 
them,  and  pardons  them,  in  a  few  months  they  will  con- 
spire to  overthrow  him.  To  their  own  chiefs,  who  preside 
over  them,  they  are  obedient,  if  their  rulers  are  fitted  in 
mind  and  character  for  the  supreme  power.  They  will 
never  pardon  a  prince  who,  like  Dumnorix,  betrays  them. 
^They  have  good  horses  and  beasts  of  burden,  which  are 
of  great  use  to  them  for  war,  and  serve  as  a  help  to  those 
who,  when  conquered,  wish  to  flee. 

NOTES,   PHRASES,   ETC. 

I.   Translate  by  dative  of  possession. 
115 


§§  229-231]  A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

LESSON   XXXV 
Review  of  Lessons  XXVI  to  XXIX  Inclusive 

229.   Questions  : 

1.  What  is  meant  by  independent  subjunctives?  For 
what  are  they  used  ? 

2.  Is  there  any  other  way  of  expressing  a  wish  except 
by  the  optative  subjunctive  ? 

•   3.    What  is  the  imperative  mood  used  for  ? 

4.  How  do  you  express  a  prohibition  in  Latin  ? 

5.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  direct  and  an  indi- 
rect question  ?  How  are  they  expressed  in  Latin  ?  How 
many  interrogative  words  can  you  give  ?  What  is  a  double 
question  ?     How  is  it  expressed  in  Latin  ? 

6.  What  is  a  dative  of  possession  ?  A  double  dative  ? 
Partitive  genitive  ? 

230.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,  ETC 

Arrest,  retineo,  2,  retinui,  retentus.  Among,  inter  (prep,  with  ace). 

Drive  back,  send  back,  remitto,  3,  Council,  concilium,  -i  (n.). 

remisi,  remissus.  Forefathers,  maiores,  maiorum 
Reduce,  redigo,  3,  redegi,  redactus.  (rn-)- 

Remain,  permaneo,   2,   permansi.  Grain,  frumentum,  i  (n.). 

permansus.  Liberty,  libertas,  libertatis  (f.). 

Slavery,  servitiis,  servitiitis  (f.). 

COMPOSITION 

231.  When  the  ambassadors  came  to  the  Veneti  to  de- 
mand grain,  the  Veneti  called  a  council  and  said  among 
themselves  :  **  Let  us  not  send  grain  to  Crassus,  let  us  rather 
arrest  these  envoys,  and  send  this  message  to  Crassus,  '  If 
you  want  your  ambassadors,  send  us  back  our  hostages.' 

116 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  232 

Would  that  the  Romans  had  not  come  into  Gaul  and  re- 
duced us  to  slavery !  O  that  we  were  able  to  withstand 
them  !  Nevertheless,  this  is  the  time  to  try  what  we  can 
do.  We  know  how  strong  Crassus  is,  we  know  how  brave 
Caesar's  soldiers  are,  and  we  have  seen  what  sort  of  weap- 
ons the  Romans  use.  Nevertheless,  let  us  try  to  drive  them 
back  into  the  province.  Let  us  not  be  afraid.  Let  us 
obtain  our  liberty.  Shall  we  not  fight  ?  Do  we  prefer  to 
endure  the  Roman  slavery,  or  to  remain  in  the  liberty 
which  we  have  received  from  our  forefathers  ?  " 

Having  said  these  things  they  arrested  the  envoys  and 
sent  a  messenger  to  Crassus,  who  said,  "  O  Crassus,  send 
us  back  our  hostages.  Do  not  attempt  to  fight  with  us, 
for  if  you  make  war  on  us,  we  know  what  we  shall  do,  and 
you  will  never  conquer  us." 

LESSON   XXXVI 
Review  of  Lessons  XXX  to  XXXIV  Inclusive 

232.    Questions  : 

1.  What  are  the  two  periphrastic  conjugations.'*  What 
do  they  mean  ?  How  is  the  agent  expressed  after  the 
gerundive  ? 

2.  What  are  the  most  usual  uses  of  the  participles  and 
the  gerund  ? 

3.  What  do  you  know  of  the  tenses  which  follow  expres- 
sions of  duration  of  time  ? 

4.  After  what  sort  of  nouns,  adjectives,  and  verbs  is  the 
genitive  used  ?     Can  you  give  any  other  genitives  ? 

5.  What  is  the  dative  the  case  of  ?  What  sort  of  verbs 
and  adjectives  take  the  dative.^ 

6.  What  do  you  know  of  the  dative  in  connection  with 
service  ?  agent  ?  possession  ? 

117 


§§  233-234]  A   FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 

233.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  NOUNS,  ETC. 

Be  present^  adsum,  adesse,  adfui,      Naval,  navalis,  -e  (adj.). 

adfuturus.  Ship,  navis,  navis  (f.). 

Delay,    moror,     morari,    moratus      Supplies,  copiae,  -arum  (f.). 

sum. 
N'avigate,  navigo,  i . 
Strike    camp,    castra    moved,    2, 

movi,  motus. 
Suffer^  patior,  pati,  passus  sum. 

COMPOSITION 

234.  Caesar,  ^  when  he  saw  that  the  Veneti  were  about 
to  arrest  his  ambassadors  and  were  on  the  point  of  mak- 
ing war  upon  him,  thought  that  he  ^  ought  not  to  delay,  but 
should  immediately  march  against  them.  Therefore  he 
called  Brutus,  a  man  suited  to  a  naval  command,  and  said 
to  him,  "  ^  You  must  prepare  ships,  get  together  those  sup- 
plies which  are  of  use  for  ships,  and  enrol  sailors  from 
those  harbors  which  are  nearest  to  the  Veneti."  ^  When 
Brutus  had  gone,  ^because  he  thought  that  if  *he  were 
present  the  other  tribes  would  not  join  the  Veneti,  Caesar 
immediately  struck  camp.  When  he  had  been  marching 
for  a  long  time,  a  messenger  came  from  the  Veneti,  who 
said  to  Caesar,  ''For  a  long  time,  O  Caesar,  we  have  borne 
the  slavery  of  the  Romans;  but  now,  since  the  desire  for 
freedom  is  great,  our  leaders  have  persuaded  us  to  fight 
against  the  Roman  people.  Having  arrested  your  envoys, 
we  have  condemned  them  to  death,  and  the  generals  have 
commanded  me  to  say  that  they  will  not  pardon  your  am- 
bassadors, unless  you  send  back  the  hostages  you  have 
taken  from  us.  Moreover,  mindful  of  your  former  sever- 
ity, and  because  they  know  that  ^if  they  are  conquered 
they  will  be  killed,  the  Veneti  will  resist  you  most  bravely." 

118 


A  FIRST   LATIN  WRITER  [§§235-236 

NOTES,    PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  Translate  by  a  present  participle. 

2.  Translate,  it  ought  not  to  be  delayed  by  him  (gerundive). 

3.  Translate,  ships  must  be  prepared  by  you,  sailors  must  be  en- 
rolled^  etc. 

4.  Ablative  Absolute. 

5.  Translate  by  perfect  participle  passive. 

LESSON   XXXVlI 
Harvard  Entrance  Examination,  1894 

235.  The  Usipetes  and  Tencteri,  German  tribes,  were  so 
persecuted  by  the  Suevi  that  they  were  compelled  to 
abandon  their  homes,  and  wandered  about  for  many  years 
in  the  vain  search  for  a  new  abode.  Finally  they  came  to 
the  river  Rhine  with  the  design  of  crossing  into  Gaul. 
But  the  Menapii,  who  dwelt  on  both  banks  of  the  river  at 
that  point,  were  alarmed  at  the  approach  of  such  an  im- 
mense host ;  and  transporting  all  their  property  across  the 
river,  they  posted  troops  on  the  farther  bank  to  keep  the 
Germans  from  crossing.  The  latter,  having  no  ships,  re- 
sorted to  a  trick  :  they  withdrew  from  the  river,  pretending 
to  return  to  their  own  country ;  but  when  the  Menapians, 
deceived  by  their  departure,  had  come  back  to  their  homes, 
they  suddenly  turned,  and  surprising  them  by  a  rapid 
march,  massacred  them  all,  and  seized  their  ships. 

APPENDIX  I 
Main  and  Subordinate  Clauses.     The  First  Concord 

236.  A  simple  sentence  consists  of  a  subject  and  a 
predicate  : 

Caesar  conquered  the  Gaitls.     Caesar  Gallos  vicit 

119 


§§  237-239]  A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 

237.  But  the  subject  or  the  predicate  may  be  modified 
by  a  clause : 

CaesaVy  who  was  a  skillful  general^  conquered  the  GaulSy 
who  had  rebelled. 

In  this  sentence,  therefore,  Caesar  conquered  the  Gauls 
is  the  main  clause,  because  it  is  that  part  of  the  sentence 
which  makes  an  independent  statement,  while  who  was  a 
skillful  general  and  who  had  rebelled  are  called  subordinate 
clauses  because  they  modify  the  subject  and  object  respec- 
tively of  the  main  clause. 

A  subordinate  clause  is  ahvays  introduced  by  a  subordi- 
nate conjunction  or  by  a  relative. 

238.  A  sentence  may  contain  more  than  one  main 
statement ;  if  so,  these  main  clauses  are  connected  by  a 
coordinate  conjunction;  but  each  of  these  clauses  is  an 
independent  statement  and  does  not  modify  the  other : 

Caesar  went  to  Gaul,  but  Crassus  stayed  at  Rome. 
Caesar  in  Galliam   prof ectus  est,    sed    Crassus  Romae 
remansit. 

Therefore : 

A  main  clause  is  an  independent  statement,  question,  or 
command  : 

Caesar  went  to  Gaul. 

A  subordinate  clause  is  a  clause  which  modifies  the  state- 
ment of  the  main  clause  : 

Caesar,  who  was  a  skillful  general,  zvent  to  Gaul. 

239.  The  first  Concord  or  The  first  rule  of  Agreement. 
A  noun  which  is  used  to  describe  another  noun,  agrees 

with  the  noun  it  describes  in  case  : 
Caesar,  the  general.     Caesar  dux. 

120 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  240-243 

240.  There  are  two  kinds  of  these  descriptive  nouns. 
I.  Appositives,  II.  Predicate  Nominatives. 

241.  I.  Appositives. 

When  a  noun  describes  another  noun,  and  a  verb  does  not 
come  between  it  and  the  noun  it  describes,  the  descriptive 
noun  is  said  to  be  in  Apposition  with  the  noun  it  describes. 

Caesar^  the  consul,  did  this.     Caesar,  consul,  hoc  fecit. 
This  was  done  by  Caesar  the  consul. 
Hoc  a  Caesare  consule  factum  est. 

Note.  —  A  noun  in  Apposition  may  be  used  in  Latin  in  some  cases 
when  in  English  we  would  have  a  subordinate  clause. 

Caesar,  when  he  was  consul,  did  this.     Caesar,  consul,  hoc  fecit. 

Diviciacus,  who  was  the  most  powerful  man  in  Gaul,  was  king  of 
the  Suessiones. 

Diviciacus,  totius  GaUiae  potentissimus,  Suessionum  rex  fuit. 

But: 

242.  II.  If  a  verb  comes  between  the  descriptive  noun 
and  the  noun  described,  the  descriptive  noun  is  said  to  be 
in  Predicate  Nominative  with  the  noun  described. 

Caesar  was  the  consul  of  the  Romans. 
Caesar  erat  Romanorum  consul. 

Note  i.  —  Predicate  nominative  is  used  usually  with  the  following 
verbs  :  to  be,  ^um ;  to  become,  be  made,  f  10 ;  to  appear,  appareo ;  and 
passives. 

Note  2.  —  A  predicate  nominative  which  agrees  with  two  or  more 
singular  nouns  is  put  into  the  plural. 

Crassus  and  Labienus  were  the  lieutenants  of  Caesar. 

Crassus  et  Labienus  legati  Caesaris  erant. 

EXAMPLES 

243.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  main  and 
subordinate  clauses,  the  Appositives,  and  Predicate  Nomi- 
natives : 

121 


§244] 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


1.  Labienus  and  Crassits^  when  they  were  young  me^t^ 
were  the  lieutenants  of  Caesar. 

Labienus  et  Crassus,  adulescentes,  Caesaris  legati  erant. 

2.  The  Nervii  and  Aduatuci,  Gallic  tribes^  conspired 
against  Caesar^  the  general  of  the  Romans. 

Nervii  Aduatucique,  gentes  Gallicae,  contra  Caesarem, 
imperatorem  Romanorum,  coniuraverunt. 

3.  The  '^nan  who  came  to  Caesar  was  Iccius^  a  Gaul. 
Vir  qui  ad  Caesarem  venit  Iccius  Gallus  erat. 

4.  The  Gauls  fought  many  battles  with  Labienus  and 
Crassus^  who^  when  they  were  young  men^  had  been  the  lieu- 
tenants of  Caesar. 

Galli  multas  pugnas  cum  Labieno  et  Crasso,  qui,  adules- 
centes, fuerant  Caesaris  legati,  pugnabant. 


244.     VOCABULARY 


VERBS 

Be^  sum,  esse,  fui,  futurus. 
Cojne^  venio,  4,  veni,  ventus. 
Conquer.,  supero,  i. 
Have,  habeo,  2. 

Live,  incolo,  3,  incolui, . 

Know,   cognosco,    3,   cognovi,   co- 

gnitus. 
March,  iter  facio,  3,  feci,  factus. 
Sail,  navigo,  i. 
Send,  mitto,  3,  misi,  missus. 
Teach,  doceo,  2,  docui,  doctus. 

NOUNS,   ETC. 

Against,  contra  (prep,  with  ace). 
And  so,  itaque. 
Boy,  puer,  -i  (m.)» 


Consul,  consul,  consulis  (m.). 
From,  ab  (prep,  with  abl.). 
Gallic,  Gallicus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
General,    imperator,    imperatoris 

(m.). 
Island,  insula,  -ae  (f.). 
Lieutenant,  legatus,  -i  (m.). 
Many,  multus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Navigation,     navigatio,     naviga- 

tionis  (f.). 
Near,  prope  (prep,  with  ace). 
Ocean,  oceanus,  -i  (m.). 
Sea,  mare,  maris  (n.). 
Skillful,  peritus,  -a,  -um  (adj.) 
To.  ad  (prep,  with  ace). 
Tribe,  gens,  gentis  (f.). 
With,  cum  (prep,  with  abl.). 


122 


A  FIRST  LATIN  WRITER  [§§  245-248 

COMPOSITION 

245.  Caesar,  a  skillful  general,  who  had  been  consul, 
was  sent  to  Gaul.  He  conquered  the  Nervii  and  Adua- 
tuci,  Gallic  tribes,  and  marched  against  the  Veneti,  with 
his  lieutenants  Labienus  and  Crassus,  who  had  come  to 
him  from  Italy.  The  Veneti  were  a  tribe  who  lived  near 
the  sea.  They  had  many  ships,  in  which  they  sailed  to 
Britain,  an  island  in  the  ocean.  These  men,  ^when  they 
were  boys,  had  been  taught  navigation,  and  so  ^when 
they  became  men  they  knew  ^all  about  ships. 

NOTES,    PHRASES,    ETC. 

1 .  All  about,  omnia  de  with  ablative. 

2.  Appositive. 

APPENDIX   II 

The  Second  and  Third  Concords 

The  Second  Concord.     Agreement  of  Adjectives. 

246.  An  adjective  agrees  with  the  noun  it  limits  in  gen- 
der, number,  and  case : 

A  good  man,  to  a  good  woniaii,  of  a  good  gift. 
Bonus  vir,  bonae  feminae,  boni  doni. 

247.  Participles  and  adjective  pronouns  also  agree  with 
the  noun  they  limit  in  gender,  number,  and  case : 

His  army  was  conquered.     Suus  exercitus  victus  est. 

248.  An  adjective  in  agreement  with  the  subject  of  a 
verb  may  be  used  like  an  adverb : 

He  came  joyfully.     Laetus  venit. 
He  came  unwillingly.     In  Vitus  venit. 
He  was  the  first  to  come.     Primus  venit,  i.e.  he  came  the 
first. 

123 


§§  249-250]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

249.  The  Third  Concord.     Agreement  of  the  Relative. 

A  relative  agrees  with  its  Antecedent  in  gender  and  num- 
ber, but  its  case  depends  on  the  construction  of  the  clause 
in  which  it  stands  : 

He  sent  the  men  to  Caesar,  who  was  in  Gaul. 

Milites  ad  Caesarem,  qui  in  Gallia  erat,  misit. 

Here  qui  is  masculine  and  singular  because  its  anteced- 
ent Caesarem  is  masculine  and  singular;  but  qui  is  nomi- 
native because  it  is  the  subject  of  erat  and  is  Jiot  accusative 
in  agreement  with  Caesarem. 

But: 

If  there  is  an  appositive  or  predicate  nominative  in  the 
relative  clause,  the  relative  will  agree  with  that  appositive 
or  predicate  nominative  rather  than  with  its  antecedent : 

Rome,  which  is  the  capital  of  Italy,  is  a  great  city. 
Roma,  quod  est  Italiae  caput,  urbs  magna  est. 

Here  quod  although  it  refers  to  Roma  agrees  with  caput, 
because  caput  is  in  the  predicate  nominative  within  the 
relative  clause. 

EXAMPLES 

250.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  adjectives 
and  show  the  nouns  with  which  they  agree;  point  out  the 
relatives  and  account  for  their  gender,  number,  and  case. 

1.  Caesar  was  a  good  general  and  a  clever  commander. 
Caesar  erat  bonus  dux  et  imperator  peritus. 

2.  Rome,  a  great  city,  was  the  most  powerful  town  in 
the  world. 

Roma,  urbs  magna,  eratoppidum  totiusorbis  potentissimum. 

124 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§§  251-252 

3.  The   Neivii    sent  ambassado7's^    zvho    were   the   best 
fnen  of  the  state. 

Nervii  legates,  qui  primi  civitatis  erant,  miserunt. 

4.  The  horses^  which  were  good  beasts  of  burden^  were 
killed. 

Equi,  quae  erant  iumenta  bona,  occisi  sunt. 

251.  VOCABULARY 

VERBS  Brave,  fortis,  forte  (adj.)- 

„     .  -    .       /J  r    i-     \   r  11        Cavalry,  equitatus,  -us  (m.)- 

i?^;^/«,  coepi, -isse  (defective),  foil.       ^, ., ,        ,\    -    .         ;  / 

by  infin.  '  ^  ^    ^ 


Ftg/ity  pugno,  I . 


Foot  soldiers,  pedes,  peditis  (m.). 


J'    ..      .1  .,  Forest,  silva,  -ae  (f.). 

G^^,  eo,  ire,  11,  itum.  r-    ,1  ^         -+  r  a- \ 

.' ,  ,„        .^-.  Fortified,  mumtus, -a., -um  (adj.). 

Make  war  on,  bellum  miero,  m-  -^      '  -  /   \  ^     •*  ^ 

ferre,  intuli,  inlatus,  with  dative.  ,^^*!^',    ^  '      V^')- 

.  .-  .- -         .    .  A?y/>//,  laetus, -a, -um  (adi.). 

Place,  conicio,3,  conieci,  coniectus.  r  ^  ,\.  .  \r. 

Put  to  flight,  fugo, ,.  J:'y^  'f  t^t't'  '"■"■  ^^- 


NOUNS,   ETC. 


Marsh,  aestuarium,  -i  (n.). 
Others,  ceteri,  -ae,  -a  (adj.). 
Town,  oppidum,  -i  (n.) . 


Always,  semper  (adv.).  Swamp,  palus,  paludis  (f.). 

Amongst,  inter  (prep,  with  ace).         7;?rr//f^<^,perterritus,-a,-um(adj.). 
Battle,  pugna  -ae  (f.).  Woman,  mulier,  mulieris  (f.). 


COMPOSITION 

252.  The  Nervii,  who  Hved  in  the  forests,  were  the 
bravest  men  in  Gaul.  They  had  no  good  horses,  but  their 
foot  soldiers  were  brave  men  and  were  able  to  put  to  flight 
the  cavalry  of  those  who  fought  with  them.  Their  town, 
which  was  a  fortified  city,  ^  was  situated  amongst  swamps 
and  marshes.  In  this  city  they  place  the  terrified  women 
and  little  children,  and  then  ^  go  into  battle.  They  were 
the  first  to  make  war  upon  the  Romans,  and  they  fought 
joyfully.     The  other  Gauls  always  made  war  unwillingly, 

,      125 


§§  253-254]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

but  the  Nervii,  who  are  a  brave  tribe,  begin  to  fight  ^  with 
the  greatest  joy. 

NOTES,    PHRASES,   ETC. 

1.  IVas  situated^  positum  est. 

2.  To  go  into  battle,  ad  pugnam  ire. 

3.  With  the  greatest  joy,  cum  maxima  laetitia. 

APPENDIX    III 

The  Fourth  Concord.     Rules  of  Order 

253.    the  fourth  concord 

A  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  nominative  in  number 
and  person.  If  there  are  two  or  more  subjects,  the  verb 
is  plural.     If  these  subjects  are  of  different  persons,  then: 

If  one  of  the  subjects  is  first  person,  the  verb  is  first 
person  plural. 

If  there  is  no  first  person,  and  one  of  the  subjects  is  sec- 
ond person,  the  verb  is  second  person. 

Yott  and  I  ivill  go.     Ego  et  tu  ibimus. 

Yoic  a7id  Caesar  will  go.     Tu  et  Caesar  ibitis. 

Caesar  and  Crassus  zvill  go.     Caesar  et  Crassus  ibunt. 

254.     SOME    SIMPLE    RULES    OF    ORDER 

1.  Place  the  verb  of  the  main  clause  last. 

Caesar  was  sent  to  Ganl.     Caesar  ad  Galliam  missus  est. 

2.  Place  the  most  important  word  first,  and  the  next 
most  important  word  next,  and  so  on. 

Caesar  ad  Galliam  missus  est. 
Here  the  word  Caesar  has  the  place  of  importance,  show- 
ing that  it  was  he  and  no  one  else  who  was  sent  to  Gaul ; 

126 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER  [§  255 

but  in  the  sentence  Ad  Galliam  Caesar  missus  est,  the  phrase 
ad  Galliam  has  the  place  of  importance,  showing  that  it  was 
there  and  nowhere  else  that  Caesar  was  sent. 

3.  In  a  subordinate  clause  put  the  subordinate  verb  last 
in  its  own  clause,  put  the  introducing  conjunction  or  rela- 
tive first,  then  the  word  of  most  importance  in  the  subor- 
dinate clause,  and  so  on.  Place  the  subordinate  clause  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  word  it  modifies,  but  if  the  whole 
main  clause  is  modified  by  the  subordinate  clause  and  the 
subordinate  clause  is  more  important  than  the  main  clause, 
put  the  subordinate  clause  first. 

Caesar^  zvho  is  a  skillful  general^  has  conquered  the  Gauls, 
Caesar,  qui  dux  peritus  est,  Gallos  superavit. 

But: 

When  he  had  conquered  the  Gauls  he  went  to  Rome, 
Cum  Gallos  superavisset,  Romam  profectus  est. 

4.  Place  a  preposition  before  its  noun,  an  adjective 
before  its  noun  (as  a  general  rule),  and  the  negative  be- 
fore the  verb. 

He  did  not  come  with  great  speed. 
Magna  cum  celeritate  non  venit. 

EXAMPLES 

255.  In  the  following  sentences  account  for  the  person 
of  the  verbs,  and  give  reasons  for  the  order  of  the  words  : 

1 .  Those  who  have  been  the  leader's  of  this  plan  have  fled 
into  Britain. 

Ei  qui  eius  consili  principes  fuerunt  in  Britanniam  profu- 
gerunt. 

2.  He  came  to  the  town  and  pitched  his  camp  there. 
Ad  oppidum  venit  castraque  ibi  posuit. 

127 


§§  256-257]  A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 

3.  The  Gauls ^  terrified  by  the  size  of  works  which  they 
had  neither  seen  nor  heard  of  before^  sent  ambassadors  to 
Caesar. 

Galli,  magnitudine  operum  quae  neque  viderant  neque 
ante  audierant  perterriti,  legates  ad  Caesarem  miserunt. 

256.     VOCABULARY 
VERBS  Ditty ^  of&cium,  -i  (n.). 

Govern,  administro,  i.  Law,  lex,  legis  (f.). 

Hold,  habeo,  2.  Proconsul,   proconsul,  proconsulis 

Pacify,  paco,  i .  ("^0  • 

Rule,  regd,  3.  Province,  provincia,  -ae  (f.). 

Senate,  senatus,  -us  (m.). 
NOUNS,  ETC.  Time,  tempus,  temporis  (n.). 

After,  postquam  (adv.).  Whole,  totus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Capital  city,  caput,  capitis  (n.).  Wisely,  sapienter  (adj.). 

Chief  power,  imperium,  -i  (n.) .  World,  orbis,  orbis. 

COMPOSITION 

257.  Rome,  which  is  the  capital  of  Italy,  was  the  great- 
est city  of  the  world  in  the  time  of  Caesar.  The  chief 
power  was  held  ^by  two  consuls,  who  ^with  the  senate 
made  laws  and  ruled  the  people. 

After  a  man  had  been  consul  he  was  sent  ^into  a  prov- 
ince as  proconsul.  The  duty  of  the  proconsul  was  to  gov- 
ern the  people  of  his  province,  and  to  conquer  them  ^  when 
they  rebelled. 

So  Caesar  went  into  Gaul  as  proconsul.  He  governed 
wisely,  pacified  the  whole  country,  and  ^  made  it  tributary 
to  Rome. 

NOTES,  PHRASES,  ETC. 

1.  By,  a  with  ablative. 

2.  With,  cum  with  ablative. 

3.  Into,  in  with  accusative. 

4.  When  they  rebelled,  cum  deficerent. 

5.  To  make  tributary  to,  vectigalis  facere  with  dative. 

128 


VOCABULARY 


Abandon^  desero,  3,  deserui,  desertus. 

Able,   possum,   posse,    potui,    , 

with  the  complementary  infinitive. 

Abode^  domus,  -us  (f.). 

Aboutj  concerning,  de  (prep,  with 
ablative);  — adv.  circiter ;  bring 
about,  see  bring ;  be  about,  see  194. 

Absence,  absentia,  -ae  (f.) ;  in  his  ab- 
sence, he  being  absent,  eo  absente 
(ablative  absolute). 

Accept,  accipio,  3,  accepi,  acceptus. 

Access,  aditus,  -us  (m.). 

Accord,  one's  oiun,  ultro  (adv.). 

According  to,  in  accordance  with, 
translate  by  ablative  of  manner. 

Account,  on  account  of,  propter  (prep, 
with  accusative) ;  or  translate  by  ab- 
lative of  cause. 

Accuse,  insimulo,  i,  with  genitive  of 
the  charge. 

Across,  trans  (prep,  with  accusative). 

Address,  adloquor,  3,  adlocutus  sum, 
appello,  I. 

Aduatuci,  Aduatuci,  -orum  (m.), 
plural  noun. 

Advance,  successus,  -us  (m.). 

Advance,  progredior,  3,  progressus 
sum. 

Advise,  moneo,  2,  with  substantive 
purpose  clause. 

Afraid,  be,  vereor,  2,  veritus  sum, 
with  substantive  purpose  clause. 


After,  post  (adv.);  postquam  (adv.). 

Again,  iterum  (adv.). 

Against,  contra  (prep,  with  accusa« 

tive);  in  (prep,  with  accusative). 
Ago,  long  time,  see  long. 
Ahead,  send,  see  send. 
Aid,  auxilium,  -i  (n.),  subsidium, 

-i  (n.). 
Alarm,    commoveo,     2,    commovi, 

commotus. 
All,  omnis,  omnis,  omne  (adj.). 
Allow,  sin5,    3,  sivi,  situs,   usually 

with    substantive    purpose   clause; 

patior,  3,  passus  sum,  usually  with 

infinitive. 
Ally,  socius,  -i  (m.). 
Alone,  solus,  -a,  -um  (adj.);   as  adv. 

solum. 
Also,  etiam  (adv.) ;  not  only  .  .  ,  but 

also,  non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam. 
Although,   etsi,   with   protasis;    cum, 

with  subjunctive;  quamquam,  with 

indicative. 
Always,  semper  (adv.). 
Ambassador,  legatus,  -1  (m.). 
Ambush,  insidiae,  -arum  (f.),  plural 

noun. 
Among,    inter    (prep,    with    accusa- 
tive). 
Amount,  great  amount  of,    magnus 

numerus,  with  genitive. 
And,  et,  enclitic  -que,  atque,  ac 
And  so,  itaque 


FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  —  9  129 


A   PIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


AnnouncettOf  renuntio,  i,  followed  by 
indirect  discourse. 

Another,  alter,  altera,  alterum  (adj.). 

Answer,  respondeo,  2,  respond!,  re- 
sponsus,  followed  by  indirect  dis- 
course. 

Any  longer,  longius  (comp.  adv.). 

Anyone,  quis,  quae,  quid,  or  quis- 
quam,  quaequam,  quidquam. 

Apart,  keep,  see  keep. 

Approach,  aditus,  -us  (m.),  or  ad- 
ventus,  -lis  (m.). 

Approach,  to,  advenlo,  4,  adveni,  ad- 
ventus. 

Archer,  Sagittarius,  -i  (m.). 

Ar77is,  arma,  -orum  (n.),  plural  noun; 
under  a7'ms,  in  armis;  run  to  arms, 
see  run. 

Army,  exercitus,  -us  (m.) . 

Arrangement,  ordo,  ordinis  (m.). 

Arrange,  draw  up,  to,  instruo,  3,  in- 
struxi,  instructus;  constituo,  3, 
constitui,  constitiitus. 

Arrest,  comprehendo,  3,  compre- 
hend!, comprehensus. 

Arrive,  advenio,  adveni,  adventus. 

Arrival,  adventus,  -iis  (m.). 

As,  ut,  with  indicative ;  —  follows, 
sic  (adv.);  —  long  as,  quoad  (conj.). 

Ask,  ask  for,  rogo,  i,  with  accusative 
of  person  and  accusative  of  thing; 
peto,  3,  petii,  petitus,  with  a  or  ab 
and  ablative  of  person  and  accusa- 
tive of  thing ;  quaero,  3,  quaesivi, 
quaesitus,  with  de,  ex,  or  ab  and 
ablative  of  person  and  accusative  of 
thing. 

Assert,  confirmo,  i,  followed  by  indi- 
rect discourse. 

At,  ablative  of  place  where  with  in, 
or  locative  case;  at,  in  the  sense  of 

I 


near,  ad  with  accusative;  — length, 

denique   (adv.) ;    —  once,  without 

delay,  sine  mora. 
Atrebates,  Atrebates,  -um  (m.),  plural 

noun. 
Attack,  impetus,  -iis  (m.). 
Attack,  impetum  facere,  feci,  factus 

(in),  or  adgredior,  3,  adgressus. 
Atte??ipt,  Conor,  i,  conatus  sum. 
Authority,  auctoritas,  auctoritatis  (f.). 
Await,  exspecto,  i. 
Away,    be,    absum,    abesse,    abfui, 

abfutiirus;  take  — ,  see  take. 

B 

Back,  see  under  come,  drive,  lead,  and 
look. 

Baggage,  impedimenta,  -orum  (n.), 
plural  noun. 

Band  of  men,  manus,  -iis  (f.). 

Ba7tk,  ripa,  -ae  (f.). 

Battle,  pugna,  -ae  (f.) ;  proelium,  -i 
(n.) ;  battle  li7ie  or  line  of — ,  acies, 
-ei  (f.);  begin  — ,  proelium  com- 
mittere. 

Be,  sum,  esse,  fui,  futiirus. 

Be  away,  absum,  abesse,  abfui,  ab- 
futiirus;  —  in  flight,  fugio,  3, 
f iigi,  f  ugitiirus ;  —  in  possession  of, 
potior,  potiri,  potitus  sum,  with 
ablative,  but  sometimes  with  geni- 
tive. 

Bear,  fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latus. 

Beast  of  burden,  iumentum,  -i  (n.). 

Because,  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  or 
cum  with  subjunctive ;  because  of, 
translate  by  ablative  of  cause. 

Beco7ne,  fi5,  fieri,  factus  sum ;  — 
afraid,  vereor,  veritus  sum. 

Before,  ante  (adv.  or  prep,  with  accu- 
sative). 

30 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


Begin,  coepi,  coepisse,  defective  verb 
only  used  in  perfect  tenses  and  fol- 
lowed by  indirect  discourse  ;  begin 
battle,  see  battle. 

Beginning,  initium,  -i  (n.). 

Belgae,  Belgae,  -arum  (m.),  plural 
noun. 

Bellovaci,  Bellovaci,  -orum  (m.),  plu- 
ral noun. 

Besiege,  oppugno,  I. 

Best,  seem,  see  see7n. 

Betray,  prodo,  3,  prodidi,  proditus. 

Between,  inter  (prep,  with  accusative). 

Bibrax,  Bibrax,  -actis  (f.). 

Boduognatus,  Boduognatus,  -i  (m.). 

Boldly,  audaciter  (adv.). 

Both,  ambo,  -ae,  -o;  uterque,  utraque, 
utrumque;  both  .  .  .  and^  et  .  .  . 
et. 

Bowina7i,  Sagittarius,  -i  (m.). 

Boy,  puer,  pueri  (m.). 

Bratuspatitium,  Bratuspantium,  -i 
(n.). 

Brave,  fortis,  fortis,  forte  (adj.). 

Bravely,  fortiter  (adv.). 

Bravery,  virtus,  -litis  (f.). 

Break  in,  refringo,  3,  refregi,  re- 
fractus ;  —  into,  intro,  i. 

Breath,  out  of  breath,  exanimatus,  -a, 
-um  (adj.). 

Brin^,  f  ero,  ferre,  tuli,  latus;  —  about, 
efficio,  3,  effeci,  effectus,  or  f acio,  3, 
feci,  f actus,  followed  by  ut  and  sub- 
junctive of  result. 

Bring  up,  condiico,  3,  conduxi,  con- 
ductus  (of  soldiers) ;  (sheds)  ago, 
agere,  egi,  actus;  —  upon,  infero, 
inferre,  intuli,  inlatus;  —  together, 
condiic5,  3,  conduxi,  conductus. 

Britain,  Britannia,  -ae  (f.). 

Brutus,  Brutus,  i  (m.). 

13 


Build,  to,  exstruo,  3,  exstruxi,  ex- 
structus;  aedifico,  i. 

Burden,  beasts  of,  see  beast. 

But,  sed,  autem    (postpositive);  — 

also,  sed  etiam;  —  that,  quin,  with 

subjunctive,  after  verbs  of  doubting. 
By,  a  or  ab,  with  the  ablative  of  the 

agent ;    otherwise    express   by   the 

ablative. 


Caesar,  Caesar,  -aris  (m.). 

Call,  appello,  I. 

Camp^  castra,  -orum  (n.),  plural  noun ; 

pitch  — ,  castra   pono,   3,    posui, 

positus;  strike  — ,  castra  moveo, 

2,  movi,  motus. 
Ca77ip  follower,  calo,  calonis  (m.). 
Ca7i,  be  able,  possum,  posse,  potui, 

,   followed   by   complementary 

infinitive. 
Capital  city,  caput,  capitis  (n.). 
Captive,  captivus,  -i  (m.). 
Capture,  expugno,  i ;  capio,  3,  cepi, 

captus. 
Care,  cura,  -ae  (f.). 
Cavalry,  equitatus,  -us  (m.). 
Cavalry,  equester,  equestris,  equestre 

(adj.). 
Ce7iturion,  centuri5,  centurionis  (m.). 
Character,  natura,  -ae  (f.). 
Charge,  signa  infer5,  inferre,  intuli, 

inlatus,  with  dative. 
Charge  of  have,   be  i7t  co77imand  of, 

praesum,  praeesse,  praefui,  with 

dative. 
Check,  tardo,  i. 

Chief,  princeps,  principis  (m.). 
Chief  co7n7nand  or  power,  summa  (ae 

[f.])  imparl. 
Children,  liberi,  -orum,  plural  noun. 
I 


A   FIRST    LATIN    WRITER 


City^  urbs,  urbis  (f.). 

Clamor,  clamor,  clamoris  (m.). 

Clemency  J  dementia,  -ae  (f.). 

Colled,  conligo,  3,  conlegi,  conlectus. 

Collect  together,  conf  ero,  conf  erre,  con- 
tuli,  conlatus. 

Come,  venio,  4,  veni,  ventus;  —  back, 
redeo,  4,  redii,  reditus;  —  between, 
intervenio,  4,  interveni,  interven- 
tus;  —  out  of,  exe5,  4,  exii,  exitus; 
—  ///,  advenio,  4,  adveni,  adven- 
tus;  —  upon,  invenio,  4,  inveni, 
inventus  ;  —  to,  aded,  4,  adii,  adi- 
tus  ;  —  together,  convenio,  4,  con- 
veni,  conventus. 

Coming,  adventus,  -iis  (m.). 

Command,  mandatum,  -i  (n.)  ;  im- 
perium,  -i;  supreme — ,  summa  (ae 
[f.J)  imperi;  be  in  —  of,  praesum, 
praeesse,  praef  ui ;  to  — ,  iubeo,  2, 
iussi,  iussus,  with  infinitive ;  im- 
pero,  I,  with  purpose  clause  and 
dative. 

Commit  oneself ,  committS,  3,  commisi, 
commissus,  with  reflexive  and  da- 
tive. 

Common,  commiinis,  communis,  com- 
mune (adj.). 

Compel,  cogo,  3,  coegi,  coactus. 

Concerning,  de  (prep,  with  ablative). 

Condemn,  damno,  i,  with  genitive  of 
penalty. 

Condition,  condicio,  condicionis  (f.). 

Conquer,  vinco,  3,  vici,  victus ;  su- 
per©, I. 

Conqueror,  victor,  victoris  (m.). 

Consent,  consentio,  4. 

Conspire,  coniiiro,  i. 

Constj'uct,  exstruo,  3,  exstruxi,  ex- 
structus. 

Consul,  consul,  consulis  (m.). 

I 


Council,  concilium,  -i  (n.). 
Country,  rus,  riiris  (n.), terra,  -ae  (f.); 

xa^zmng  fatherland,  patria,  -ae  (f.). 
Courage,  virtiis,  virtiitis  (f.). 
Covering,  tegimentum,  -i  (n.). 
Coivard,  ignavus,  -i  (m.). 
Crassus,  Crassus,  -i  (m.). 
Crime,  noxia,  -ae  (f.). 
Critical,  matter  in  a  —  state,  res  in 

angusto. 
Cross,  transe5,  4,  transii,  transitus. 
Crowded  together,  conf  ertus,  -a,  -um 

(adj.). 
Cry  out,  exclamo,  i. 
Ctdtivate,  col5,  3,  colui,  cultus. 
Custom,     consuetiido,     consuetudi- 

nis  (f.). 
Customary,  usitatus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 


Danger,  periculum,  -i  (n.). 
Dare,  audeo,  2,  ausus  sum. 
Daring,  audax,  -acis  (adj.). 
Dawn,  prima  liice,  i.e,  at  dawn. 
Day,  dies,  diei  (m.);   on  the  —  after 

that — ,  postridie  eius  diei ;   space 

of  three  — ,  see  space. 
Dead,  be,  morior,  3,  mortuus  sum. 
Death,    conde??tn   to,   capitis    damno 

(I). 
Deceive,  fallo,  3,  fefelli,  falsus. 
Decide,  constituo,  3,  constitui,  con- 

stitiitus,  with  infinitive. 
Deed,  factum,  -i  (n.). 
Defeat,  clades,  -is  (f.). 
Defeat,  to,  fugo,  I ;  supero,  i. 
Defend,    defendo,    3,    defend!,    de- 

fensus. 
Defender,  defensor,  defensoris  (m.). 
Delay,  mora,  -ae  (f.). 
Delay,  to,  moror,  i,  moratus  sum. 

32 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


Demand^    postulo,    i,   with    ace.    of 

thing  and  ab  with  abl.  of  person; 

posco,  3,  poposci, . 

Depart,    proficiscor,     3,     profectus 

sum. 
Departure,    profectio,     profectionis 

(f.). 
Deprive,  despolio,  i,  with  ablative. 
Descended  from,  be,  orior,  4,  ortus  sum. 
Deserted,  desertus, -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Deserter,  desertor,  desertoris  (m.). 
Design,  consilium,  -i ;  with  the  —  of, 

eo   consilio,   followed   by  ut   with 

subjunctive. 
Desire,  cupiditas,  cupiditatis  (f.). 
Desirous,  cupidus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Desirous  of,  be,  studeo,  2,  studui, , 

with  dative. 
Despair,  despair  of,  to,  despero,  i. 
Destitute  of,  vacuus,  -a,  -um  (adj.), 

with  ab  and  the  ablative. 
Destroy,  deleo,  2,  delevi,  deletus. 
Determine,    constituo,    3,    constitui, 

constitiitus,  with  infinitive. 
Die,  morior,  3,  mortuus  sum  (future 

participle  moriturus). 
Difficult,  difficilis,  -e  (adj.). 
Disaster,  calamitas,  calamitatis  (f.). 
Disgrace,        turpitude,         turpitii- 

dinis  (f.). 
Distance,  spatium,  -i  (n.). 
Disturb,  perturbo,  i. 
Diviciacus,  Diviciacus,  -i  (m.). 
Divide,  divido,  3,  divisi,  divisus. 
Do,  facio,  3,  feci,  f actus;  ago,  3,  egi, 

actus. 
Done,   be,   become,    fio,   fieri,   f actus 

sum. 
Doubt,  dubium,  -i  (n.). 
Doubt,  to,  dubito,  i,  with  quin  and  the 

subjunctive. 


Down,  run,  decurro,  3,  decucurri, 
decursus  ;  drive  — ,  see  drive. 

Drazv  off,  detraho,  3,  detraxi,  detrac 
tus. 

Draw  up,  instru5,  3,  instruxi, 
instructus. 

Drive,  ago,  3,  egi,  actus;  — back^ 
repello,  3,  reppuli,  repulsus ;  — 
reicio,  3,  reieci,  reiectus ;  —  dozvjt, 
deicio,  3,  deieci,  deiectus ;  —  out, 
expello,  3,  expuli,  expulsus  ;  — 
up,  adigo,  3,  adegi,  adactus ;  — 
together,  cogo,  3,  coegi,  cdactus. 

Duimiorix,  Dumnorix,  Dumno- 
rigis  (m.). 

Duty,  officium,  -i  (n.). 

Dwell,  incolo,  3,  incolui, . 


Each,   each    one,  uterque,    utraque, 

utrumque  (adj.);  each  other, from, 

translate  by  the  one  from  the  other, 

alius  ab  alio. 
Easily,  facile  (adv.). 
Easy  thing,  to  be  an,  non  quicquam 

negoti  esse 
Eighth,    octavus,     -a,    -um     (num. 

adj.). 
Elders,  maiores,  maiorum  (m). 
Eleventh,  undecimus,  -a,  -um  (num. 

adj.). 
Embarrassed,    impeditus,    -a,    -um 

(adj.). 
Employed  in,  be,  versor,  i. 
Encourage,  cohortor,  I. 
Endure,  patior,  3,  passus  sum. 
Enemy,  hostis,  -is  (c). 
Engine  of  war,  machinatio,  machi- 

nationis    (f.);   siege — ,  opus,  ope- 

ris  (n.). 
Enough,  satis  (adj.). 

33 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


Enrol,  conscribo,  3,  conscripsi,  con- 

scriptus. 
Enter,  ingredior,  3,  ingressus  sum. 
Envoy,  legatus,  -i  (m.). 
Escape,  effugio,  3,  effugi,  effugiturus. 
Especially,  praesertim  (adv.). 
Even,  etiam  (adv.). 
Ever,  unquam  (adv.). 
Excel,  antecedo,  3,  antecessi,  ante- 

cessus. 
Expect,  exspecto,  i. 
Expectation,  Opinio,  opinionis,  (f.). 
Exposed,  nudatus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

F 

Fall,  cado,  3,  cecidi,  casus. 

Fall  into,  incido,  3,  incidi,  incasiirus. 

Far,  too,  paulo  longius  (adv.). 

Farther,  ulterior,  -ius  (comp.  adj.). 

Favorable,  secundus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Fear,  timor,  timoris  (m.). 

Fear,  to,  vereor,  2,  veritus  sum,  with 
substantive  purpose  clause. 

Few,  paucus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Fickle,  instabilis,  -is,  -e  (adj.). 

Field,  ager,  agri  (m.). 

Fierce,  acer,  acris,  acre  (adj.). 

Fierceness,  ferocia,  ae  (f.). 

Fiercely,  acriter  (adv.). 

Fifty,  quinquaginta  (indecl.  num. 
adj.). 

Fight,  pugna,  -ae  (f.),  proelium,  -i 
(n.). 

Fight,  to,  pugno,  i ;  contendo,  3,  con- 
tend!, contentus,  and  cum  with 
ablative. 

Fighting  man,  armatus,  -i  (m.). 

Finally,  denique  (adv.). 

Find,  to,  invenio,  4,  inveni,  inventus ; 
—  out,  reperio,  4,  repperi,  repertus, 

I 


usually   followed    by   indirect    dis- 
course. 
Fire,  ignis,  -is  (m.). 
First,  primus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

First  men,  primi,  -orum  (m.). 

Fitted,  aptus,  -a,  -um  (adj.) ;  idoneus, 
-a,  -um  (adj.). 

Five,  quinque  (num.  adj.  indecl.). 

Flank,  latus,  lateris  (n.). 

Flee,  fugio,  3,  fiigi,  fugiturus. 

Flight,  fuga,  -ae  (f.)  ;  —put  to,  fug5, 
I  ;  be  in  — ,  fugio,  3,  fugi,  fugi- 
turus. 

Folloio,  sequor,  3,  secutus  sum. 

Follows,  as,  sic  (adv.). 

Follower,  see  camp. 

Foot,  pes,  pedis  (m.). 

Foot  soldier,  pedes,  peditis  (m.). 

For,  nam  (conj.)  ;  meaning  on  behalf 
of,  pro,  with  abl. ;  meaning  to,  ad, 
with  accusative  ;  in  expressions  of 
duration  of  time  is  omitted ;  for 
battle,  ad  pugnandum ;  in  dative 
of  service  is  expressed  by  dative; 
after  nouns  having  a  transitive  sense 
is  expressed  by  genitive. 

Forced  march,  magnum  iter,  magni 
itineris  (n.). 

Forces,  copiae,  -arum(f.),  plural  noun. 

Ford,  vadum,  -i  (n.). 

Forefathers,  maiores,  maiorum  (m.), 
plural  noun. 

Forest,  silva,  -ae  (f.). 

Forget,  be  forgetful  of,  obliviscor,  3, 
oblitus  sum. 

Former,  pristinus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Fort,  castellum, -i  (n.). 

Forth,  see  rush  forth. 

Fortification,  munitio,  munitionis 
(f.);  work  on  the — ,  opus,  Operis 
(n.). 

34 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


Fortified,  munitus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Fortify,  munio,  4. 

Fortune,  fortuna,  -ae  (f.) ;  res,  rei  (f.). 

Free,  to  set,  libero,  i. 

Freedom,  libertas,  libertatis  (f.). 

Freely,  libere  (adv.). 

Friendship,  amicitia,  -ae  (f.). 

Frightened,  be,  vereor,  2,  veritus  sum, 

with  substantive  purpose  clause. 
From,  ab  or  ex  (prep,  with  ablative) ; 

after  verbs  of  hindering,  see  62  and 

77- 
Front,  in,  a  f  ronte. 
Full  speed,  at,  incitato  cursu. 
Further,  ulterior,  ulteriot,  ulterius 

(adj.). 
Fury,  furor,  furoris  (m.). 


Gain  possession  of,  potior,  4,  potitus 
sum,  with  ablative. 

Gallic,  Gallicus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Gate,  porta,  -ae  (f.). 

Gather  together,  confero,  conferre, 
contuli,  conlatus. 

Gaul,  Gallia,  -ae  (f.). 

Gaul,  Gallus,  -i  (m.). 

General,  dux,  ducis  (m.),  imperator, 
imperatoris  (m.). 

German,  Germanus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Germany,  Germania,  -ae  (f). 

Get  possession  of,  potior,  4,  potitus 
sum,  with  ablative. 

Get  together,  confero,  conferre,  con- 
tuli, conlatus. 

Give,  do,  dare,  dedi,  datus  ;  —  back, 
remitto,  3,  remisi,  remissus;  — 
up,  trado,  3,  tradidi,  traditus. 

Go,  e5,  ire,  ii,  itum ;  proficiscor,  3, 
profectus  sum ;  —  into,  ineo,  in- 
ire,  inii,  initus ;  —  across,  transeo. 


God,  deus,  -i  (m.). 

Good,  bonus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Govern,  administro,  i. 

Governments,  new,  nova  imperia  (n,), 
novae  res  (f.)  (plural). 

Grain,  frumentum,  -i  (n.). 

Grant,  do,  dare,  dedi,  datus. 

Great,  magnus,  -a,  -um  (adj.)  ;  — 
amount  of,  magnus  numerus,  with 
genitive ;  so  — ,  tantus,  -a,  -um 
(adj.);  how  — ,  quantus  -a,  -um 
(adj.). 

Ground,  hold  one's,  COnsistO,  3,  COn- 
stiti, . 

Guard,  to,   servo,  I. 

Guard,  a,  praesidium,  -i  (n.). 

Guilty,  noxius,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 


Haeduan,  Haeduus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Haedui,  Haedui,  -orum  (m.). 
Hand,  manus,  -iis  (f.). 
Hand   over    to,   trado,    3,    tradidi, 

traditus. 
Happens,  it,  accidit,  3,  accidit, , 

impersonal  followed  by  ut  with  sub- 
junctive. 
Harbor,  portus,  -US  (m.). 
Hard  pressed,  be,  passive  of  prem5,  3, 

pressi,  pressus. 
Hasten,  contendo,  3,  contendi,  con- 

tentus,  with  ad  and  accusative. 
Have,  habeo,  2 ;  —  charge  of,  prae- 

sum,  praeesse,praefui,  with  dative  ; 

—  possession  of,  potior,  4,  potitus 

sum. 
He,  she,  it,  plural  they,  is,  ea,  id  (dem. 

pron.) ;  in  oblique  cases  in  reference 

to  the  subject,  sui,  sibi,  se,  se. 
Headlong,      praeceps,      praecipitis 

(adj.). 

35 


A  FIRST  LATIN  WRITER 


HeaVy  audio,  4,  followed  by  indirect 
discourse. 

Hedge^  saepes,  -is  (f.). 

Help,  auxilium,  -i  (n.). 

Help,  to,  adiuvo,  i,  adiuvi,  adiiitus. 

Here,  hie  (adv.). 

Hid,  see  lie. 

Higher,  superior,  -ior,  -ius  (adj.) ;  al- 
tior,  -ior,  -ius  (adj.). 

Hill,  collis,  coUis  (m.). 

Himself,  herself,  itself,  ipsa,  ipse,  ip- 
sum  (pron.  adj.);  in  reference  to 
subject  in  oblique  cases,  sui,  etc. 

Hinder,  impedio,  4,  deterred,  2. 

His,  hers,  its,  his  own  (in  reference  to 
subject),  suus,  -a,  -um;  (in  refer- 
ence to  someone  or  something  else), 
eius  (sing.),  of  him,  of  her,  of  it ; 
his  men,  sui,  suorum  (m.). 

Hold,  teneo,  2,  tenui,  tentus  ;  habeo, 
2,  habui,  habitus  ;  —  one'' s ground, 
to,  consisto,  3,  constiti, ad. 

Hold  out,  to,  sustineo,  2,  sustinui,  sus- 
tentus  ;  meaning  extend,  pando,  3, 
pandi,  passus. 

Home,  domus,  -iis  (f.). 

Hope,  a,  spes,  spei  (f.). 

Hope,  spero,  i,  followed  by  future 
infinitive  of  indirect  discourse. 

Horse,  equus,  -i  (m.) ;  meaning  horse- 
men, equites,  -um  (m.). 

Horseman,  eques,  equitis  (m.). 

Host,  multitudo,  multitudinis  (f.). 

Hostage,  obses,  obsidis  (c). 

Hour,  hora,  -ae  (f.). 

How?  quam? 

However,  autem,  postpositive  adverb. 

How  great?  quantus,  -a,  -um?  (adj.). 

How  many?  quot?  (indecl.  adj.). 

How  powerful?  quantus.  -a,  -um? 
(adj.). 


Hundred,  centum  (indecl.  num.  adj.) ; 
six  — ,  sescenti,  -ae,  -a  (num.  adj.). 


/,  ego,  mei,  plural  nos. 

Iccius,  Iccius,  -i  (m.). 

If,  si  (conj.). 

Immediately,  extemplo  (adv.). 

Immense,  such  an,  tantus,  -a,  -um 
(adj.). 

In,  in  (prep,  with  ablative) ;  is  omitted 
in  expressions  of  time. 

In  order  that,  in  order  to,  ut  with  the 
subjunctive. 

Inasmuch  as,  quoniam  (conj.). 

Inch,  digitus,  -i  (m.). 

Increase,  augeo,  2,  auxi,  auctus. 

Influence,  auctoritas,  auctorita- 
tis  (f.). 

Inform,  to,  certiorem  facio,  3,  feci, 
factus,  followed  by  indirect  dis- 
course. 

In  order  that,  ut,  negative,  ne,  fol- 
lowed by  subjunctive  of  purpose. 

In  the  rear  of,  post  (prep,  with  accu- 
sative). 

Intettd,  in  animo  habeo,  2. 

Interest,  be  of,  interest,  interesse, 
interfuit,  followed  by  infinitive,  see 
32,  note  3. 

Interior  of,  interior,  -ior,  -ius 
(adj.). 

Into,  in  (prep,  with  accusative) ;  break 
— ,  see  break. 

Island,  insula,  -ae  (f.). 

//,  id,  eius  (n.). 

Italy,  Italia,  -ae  (f.). 

Its,  in  reference  to  subject,  suus,  -a, 
-um  ;  in  reference  to  something  else, 
eius,  of  it. 


A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 


Join,  coniungo,  3,  coniunxi,  con- 
iunctus. 

Journey,  iter  facio,  3,  feci,  factus. 

Joy,  laetitia,  -ae  (f.). 

Joyful,  laetus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Joyfully,  render  by  laetus  in  agree- 
ment with  the  subject. 

Just  like,  consimilis,  -is,  -e  (adj.). 


Keep,  habeo,  2;  teneo,  2,  tenui, 
tentus  ;  — ,  when  used  with  within 
in  the  sense  of  restrain,  contineo, 
2,  continui,  contentus,  with  reflex- 
ive pronoun  ;  —  apart,  distineo,  2, 
distinui,  distentus;  —  fro??i,  pro- 
hibeo,  2,  followed  by  infinitive ;  — 
on,  render  by  the  imperfect. 

Kill,  occido,  3,  occidi,  occisus. 

Know,  cognosco,  3,  cognovi,  cog- 
nitus,  followed  by  indirect  dis- 
course. 


Labienus,  Labienus,  -i  (m.). 

Land,  terra,  -ae  (f.). 

Lastly,  denique  (adv.). 

Z^//f  r,  hic,  haec,  hoc  (dem.  pron.). 

Laugh,  laugh  at,  inrideo,  2,  inrisi,  in- 
risus,  with  dative. 

Law,  lex,  leg  is  (f.). 

Lay  waste,  vasto,  I. 

Lead,  duco,  3,  duxi,  ductus  ;  —  back, 
rediicd,  3,  reduxi,  reductus ;  —  on, 
impello,  3,  impuli,  impulsus ;  -^ 
out,  ediic5,  3,  eduxi,  eductus;  — 
together,  condiico,  3,  conduxi,  con- 
ductus. 

L^eader,  dux,  ducis  (m.). 

Leaderships  see  under. 


Leave,  relinquo,  3,  reliqui,  relictus. 
Left,    sinister,    sinistra,    sinistrum 

(adj.). 
Legion,  legio,  legionis  (f.). 
Length,  at,  denique  (adv.). 
Lest,  ne,  with  subjunctive  of  purpose. 
Let,  introduces  the  hortatory  subjunc- 
tive, is  not  translated. 
Levy,  conscribo,  3,  conscripsi,  con- 

scriptus. 
Liberal  promises,    make,    liberaliter 

polliceor,  2,  pollicitus  sum. 
Liberty,  libertas,  libertatis  (f.). 

Lie  hid,  lateo,  2,  latui, . 

Lieutenant,  legatus,  -i  (m.). 

Light  marclmig  order,  expeditus,  -a, 

-um  (adj.). 
Like,  similis,  -is,  -e  (adj.). 
Like,  just,  consimilis,  -is, -e  (adj.). 
Line,  line  of  battle,  acies,  aciei  (f.). 
Line  of  march,  agmen,  agminis  (n.). 
Listen,  listen  to,  audio,  4. 
Little,  parvus,  -a  -um  (adj.). 
Little  too  far,  paulo  longius. 
Little  while,  a,  paulisper  (adv.). 
Live,  in  sense  of  dwell,  incolo,  3,  in- 

colui,  incultus. 
Look    back,     respicio,    3,    respexi, 

respectus. 
Lottg,  longus,  -a,  -um. 
Long  time,  for  a,  for  a  long  while,  see 

under  time;  as  long  as,  quoad. 
Long  time  ago,  a,  antiquitus  (adv.). 
Longer s  any  longer,  longius  (adv.). 

M 

Magistracy,  magistratus,  -iis  (m.). 

Make,  facio,  3,  feci,  factus;  — liberal 
promises,  see  liberal;  —  trial  of, 
periclitor,  i  ;  —  make  tributary,  see 
tributary  ;  —  use    of,    see    use  ;  — 


137 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


war,  bellum  infero,  inferre,  intuli, 
inlatus,  with  dative. 

Man,  homo,  hominis  (c);  vir,  viri 
(m.). 

Maniple,  manipulus,  -i  (m.). 

Many,  multi,  -ae,  -a  (adj.). 

Many? how,  quot?  pron.  (indecl.  adj.). 

March,  iter,  itineris  (n.);  line  of—, 
agmen,  inis  (n.) ;  forced  — ,  mag- 
num iter,  magni  itineris  (n.); 
order  of — ,  ordo  agminis. 

March,  to,  iter  f acio,  3,  feci,  f actus ; 
—  out  or  away,  proficiscor,  3,  pro- 
fectus. 

Marching  order,  in  light,  expedltus^ 
-a,  -um  (adj.). 

Marsh,  aestuarium,  -i  (n.). 

Massacre,  a,  caedes,  caedis  (f.). 

Massacre,  to,  caedo,  3,  cecidi,  caesus. 

Matter  in  a  critical  state,  see  critical. 

Menapii,  Menapii,  -orum  (m.). 

Merchant,  mercator,  mercatoris  (m.). 

Message,  nuntius,  -i  (m.). 

Messenger,  nuntius,  -i  (m.). 

Middle  of,  medius,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Mile,  milia  (n.)  passuum  (plural). 

Military  science,  res  militaris  (f.). 

Mind,  animus,  -i  (m.) ;  mens,  men- 
tis (f.). 

Mindful  of,  memor,  memoris  (adj.). 

More,  magis  (adv.). 

More  than,  magis  quam. 

Moreover,  autem  (postpositive  ad- 
verb). 

Morini,  Morini,  -orum  (m.). 

Most,  render  by  the  superlative. 

Mound,  agger,  aggeris  (m.). 

Move,  moveo,  2,  movi,  motus. 

Much, mviltum  (adv.);  multo  (adv.). 

Much,  multus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Much,  so,  tantus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

I 


Multitude,    multitiido,  multitudinis 

(f.). 
My,  mens,  -a,  -um  (poss.  pron.). 

N 
Nation,  natio,  nationis  (f.). 
Nature,  natura,  -ae  (f.). 
Naval,  navalis,  -is,  -e  (adj.). 
Navigation,  navigatio,  navigationis 

(f.). 
Near,  prope  (prep,  with  accusative) ; 

ad  (prep,  with  accusative). 
Nearest,  proximus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Nearest  to,  finitimus,  -a,  -um  (adj.), 

with  dative. 
Necessary,  be,  necesse  est,  esse,  fuit. 
Need,  you  —  not  fear,  translate  by  "be 

unwilling  to  fear,"  noli  vereri. 
Neighbors,  finitimi,  -orum  (m.). 
Nervii,  Nervii,  -orum  (m.). 
Never,  nunquam  (adv.). 
Nevertheless,  tamen  (adv.). 
Neiv,  novus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Neiv  governments,  nova  imperia  (n.), 

or  novae  res  (f.),  plural. 
Neivs,  nuntius,  -i  (m.). 
Next  day,  postridie  eius  diei. 
Night,  nox,  noctis  (f.). 
Nine,  novem  (indecl.  num.  adj.). 
iV<7z.yf,  tumultus, -us  (n.). 
None,  'no,  nuUus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
No  one,  not  one,  nemo,  neminis  (c.) 

(never    use    genitive    neminis    or 

ablative   nemine,   but   use   instead 

nuUius,  nullo). 
Not,  no,  non;  with  hortatory  subjunc- 
tive, ne ;  not  yet,  nondum. 
Not  only  ,  .  ,  but  also,  non  soliim, 

.  .  .  sed  etiam. 
Nothing,  nihil  (indecl.  n,). 
Noviodunum,  Noviodiinum,  -i  (n.). 

38 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


Now,  nunc;  iam  (adv.). 
Number,  numerus,  -i. 


Obey,  be  obedient  to,  pareo,   2,  with 

dative. 
Obtain,  pario,  3,  peperi,  partus;  im- 

petro,  I,  of  a  request ;  — possession 

of,  potior,  4,  with  ablative. 
Ocean,  oceanus,  -i  (m.). 
Oh  that!  would  that!  utinam  (adv.). 
On,  in  expressions  of  time  render  by 

the  ablative;  in  expressions  of  place 

by  in  and  the  ablative. 
On  account  of,  propter    (prep,  with 

accusative  or  use  ablative  of  cause). 
On  the  other  side  of,  trans  (prep,  with 

accusative). 
On  this  side  of,  cis  (prep,  with  accusa- 
tive). 
Once,  at,  without  delay,  sine  mora. 
One,  iinus,  -a,  -um  (num.  adj.). 
One  at  a  time,  singuli,  -ae,  -a,  plural 

adjective. 
Only,  solum  (adv.) ;  modo  (adv.) ;  not 

only  .  ,  ,  but  also,  non  solum  .  .  . 

sed  etiam. 
Open  up,  laxo,  i. 
Operation,  Opus,  Operis  (n.) . 
Or,  aut  (conj.);   an  (conj.). 
Order,  mandatum,  -i  (n.) ;  in  —  that, 

see  in. 
Order,  iubeo,   2,  iussi,  iussus,  with 

infinitive ;    impero,  i,  with  ut  and 

subjunctive  and  dative  of  person. 
Order,  in  light  marching,  expeditus, 

-a,  -um  (adj.). 
Order    of  march,   agmen,   agminis 

(n.). 
Other,  alius,  -a,  -um  (adj.)  ;  on  the  — 

side  ^_/^  trans  (prep,  with  accusative) ; 

I 


other,  in  the  sense  of  the  rest,  reli- 

qui,  -ae,  -a. 
Ought,  oportet,  ere,  opottuit,  followed 

by  infinitive,  or  render  by  the  ge- 
rundive. 
Our,  noster,  nostra,  nostrum  (poss. 

pron. ) ;  —  soldiers,    nostri,    -Drum 

(m.). 
Our  own  accord,  ultro  (adv.). 
Ourselves,  nos  ipsi,  nos  ipsae. 
Outnumber,  numero  supero,  i. 
Out  of,  ex  (prep,  with  ablative). 
Out  of  breath,  exanimatus,  -a,  -um 

(adj.). 
Overcome,  supero,  i. 
Overthrow,   adfligo,   3,   adflixi,   ad- 

flictus. 
Overwhelm,    opprim5,    3,    oppress!, 

oppressus. 

P 

Pacify,  paco,  I. 

Pardon,  venia,  -ae  (f.). 

Pardon,  to,  ignosco,  3,  ignovi,  igno- 

tus,  with  dative. 
Part,  pars,  partis  (f.). 
Peace,  pax,  pacis  (f.). 
People,  populus,  -i  (m.). 
Perceive,    sentio,    4,    sensi,  sensus, 

followed     by     indirect     discourse; 

meaning  to  see,  intelligo,  3,  intel- 

lexi,  intellectus. 
Permit,  sino,  3,  sivi,  situs,  followed 

by  ut  with  subjunctive  of  purpose. 
Persecute,  exagito,  i. 
Persuade,    persuadeo,    2,    persuasi, 

persuasus,  with  dative  and  ut  with 

subjunctive  of  purpose. 
Pitch  camp,  castra  pono,  3,  posui, 

positus. 
Place,  locus,  -i    (m.)  ;     plural,   loca, 

-orum  (n.). 

39 


A  FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


Place,  to,  pono,  3,  posui,  positus. 

Plan,  consilium,  -i  (n.). 

Plead  for,  verba  facio,  3,  feci,  factus, 

and  pro,  with  ablative. 
Please,  placeo,   2,   usually  used  im- 
personally. 
Plunder,  praedor,  i. 
Point,  at  that,  eo  loco;  on  the  —  of, 

render  by  the  periphrastic  conjuga- 
tion, see  194. 
Position,  locus,  -i  (m.)  ;   plural,  loca, 

-orum  (n.);  static,  stationis. 
Possessio7ts,  themselves  and  all  their,  se 

suaque  omnia. 
Possession  of,  take,  potior,  4,  potitus 

sum,  with  ablative. 
Possible,  be,  potest,  pOSSe,  potuit. 
Post,  static,  stationis  (f.). 
Post,  pono,  3,  posui,  positus. 
Power,  imperium,  -i   (n.);    supreme 

— ,  summa  (ae  [f.])  imperi. 
Powerful,    potens,    potentis    (adj.), 

with  genitive  ;  how  — ,  quantus,  -a, 

-um?  (adj.). 
Praise,  laudo,  I. 
Prefer,    malo,    malle,    malui,    with 

infinitive,  or  ut  with  subjunctive. 
Prepare,  paro,  i . 

Prepared,  paratus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Presence,  praesentia,  -ae  (f.). 
Present,  be,   adsum,   adesse,   adfui, 

adfutiirus  ;   if  he  were  present,  eo 

praesente  (abl.  absolute). 
Preserve,  conserv5,  i. 
Preside,  preside  over,  praesum,  prae- 

esse,  praefui,  with  dative. 
Press  hard,  premo,  3,  pressi,  pressus. 
Pretend,  simulo,  i. 
Prevent,  prohibeo,  2,  with  infinitive ; 

impedio,  4,  with  ne  and  subjunctive  ; 

negative  with  quin  and  subjunctive. 

I 


Prince,  princeps,  principis  (m.). 

Proconsul,  proconsul,  proconsulis 
(m.). 

Promise,  polliceor,  2,  pollicitus  sum, 
followed  by  future  infinitive  of  indi- 
rect discourse;  make  liberal  prom- 
ises, see  liberal. 

Property,  bona,  -orum  (n.),  plural 
noun. 

Protect,  tueor,  2,  tiitus  sum. 

Province,  provincia,  -ae  (f.). 

Purpose,  with  the —  of,  e5  consilio 
with  ut  and  the  subjunctive;  or  ad 
with  the  gerundive. 

Pursue,  prosequor,  3,prosecutus  sum. 

Put  to  flight,  f  ugo,  I . 


Question,  quaestio,  quaestionis. 
Quickly,  celeriter  (adv.). 


Raise,  tollo,   3,   sustuli,    sublatus ; 

propono,  3,  proposui,   propositus 

(of  a  standard). 
Rapid,  celer,  celeris,  celere  (adj.). 
Rather,  potius  (adv.). 
Rather  .  .  .  than,  potius  .  .  .  quam. 
Reach^  advenio,  4,  veni,  ventus,  or 

pervenio,  perveni,  perventus. 
Ready,  be,  paratus  esse. 
Ready,  paratus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Rear  of,    in    the,    post    (prep,    with 

accusative). 
Rear,  the,  novissimum  agmen  (n.). 
Rebel,  deficio,  3,  defeci,  defectus. 
Receive,  accipio,  3,  accepi,  acceptus; 

recipio,  3,  recepi,  receptus. 
Recklessly,  \,^vciffL^  (adv.). 
Redoubt,  castellum,  -i  (n.). 
Reduce,  redigo,  3,  redegi,  redactus. 

40 


A   FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 


Reenfor cement,  subsidium,  -i  (n.). 

Regard  to  them,  with,  in  eos. 

Regular,  certus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Relations,  consanguine!,  -orum  (m.). 

Remain,  permaneo,  2,  permansi, 
permansus;  it  remains,  reliquum 
est, fuit. 

Remaining,  reliquus,  -a,  -um. 

Remember,  memini,  meminisse,  defec- 
tive verb  used  only  in  perfect  tenses. 

Remi,  Remi,  -orum  (m.),  plural  noun. 

Repel,  repello,  3,  reppuli,  repulsus. 

Reply,  responsum,  -i  (m.). 

Reply,  to,  responded,  2,  respond!,  re- 
sponsus. 

Report,  rumor,  riimoris  (m.). 

Report,  to,  nuntio,  i ;  certiorem  facio, 
3,  feci,  factus,  followed  by  indi- 
rect discourse. 

Repulse,  repello,  3,  reppuli,  repulsus. 

Reputation,  Opinio,  opinionis  (f.). 

Rescue,  eripio,  3,  eripui,  ereptus. 

Reserve,  subsidium,  -i  (n.). 

Resist,  resisto,  3,  restiti,  ,  vi^ith 

dative. 

Resort  to,  se  recipio,  3,  recepi, 
receptus. 

Resource,  Ops,  opis  (f.). 

Rest,  otium,  -i  (n.). 

J^est,  rest  of,  reliquus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Result,  eventus,  -us  (m.). 

Return,  reditus,  reditus  (m.). 

Return,  to,  redeo,  4,  redii,  reditus. 

Revolt,  defectio,  defectionis  (f.). 

Revolt,  to,  deficio,  3,  defeci,  defectus. 

Rhine,  Rhenus,  -i  (m.). 

Right,  rectus,  -a,  -um. 

River,  fliimen,  -inis  (n.). 

Roman,  Romanus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Rome,  Roma,  -ae  (f.). 

Rule,  to,  rego,  3,  rexi,  rectus. 

14 


Ruler,  imperator,  imperatoris  (m.). 

Run,  curro,  3,  cucurri,  cursus;  — 
back,  recurro,  3,  recucurri ;  —  down, 
decurro,  3,  decucurri,  decursus  ;  — 
out,  excurro,  3,  excucurri,  excursus; 
—  to  a7'ms,  ad  arma,  concurro,  3, 
concucurri,  concursus. 

Rumiing,  cursus,  -us  (m.). 

Rush,  concurro,  3,  concucurri,  con- 
cursus ;  — forth,  provolo,  I, 


Sabis,  the,  Sabis,  -is  (m.). 

Safe,  be,  conservor,  i. 

Safety,  saliis,  saliitis  (f.) ;  in  — ,  tuto 
(adv.). 

Sagacity,  consilium,  -i  (n.). 

Sail,  navig5,  i. 

Sailor,  nauta,  -ae  (m.). 

Sally,  excursio,  excursionis  (f.). 

Sa?ne,  idem,  eadem,  idem  (dem.  adj. 
pron.). 

Save,  servo,  i. 

Say,  dico,  3,  dixi,  dictus,  foUovi^ed  by 
indirect  discourse. 

Science,  see  military. 

Scout,  explorator,  exploratSris  (m.). 

Search,  peto,  3,  petivi,  petitus. 

See,  video,  2,  vidi,  visus,  usually  fol- 
lowed by  indirect  discourse. 

Seek,  peto,  3,  petivi,  petitus. 

Seem,  seem  best,  videor,  2,  visus  sum, 
followed  by  indirect  discourse. 

Seize,  capio,  3,  cepi,  captus. 

Sell,  vend5,  3,  vendidi,  venditus. 

Senate,  senatus,  senatus  (m.). 

Send,  mitto,  3,  misi,  missus ;  — 
ahead,  praemitto,  3,  praemisi,  prae- 
missus  ;  —  back,  remitto,  remisi, 
remissus  ;  — for,  arcesso,  3,  arces- 
sivi,  arcessitus. 

I 


A  FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 


SenoneSf  Senones,  -um  (m.). 

Separate,  singuli,  -ae,  -a,  plural  adjec- 
tive. 

Separately,  singillatim  (adv.). 

Serve  as  a,  translate  by  dative  of  ser- 
vice with  the  verb  sum. 

Service,  meritum,  -i  (n.). 

Sei  out,  proficiscor,  3,  profectus  sum. 

Setting  out,  profectio,  profectionis 
(f.). 

Set  upon,  paratus  ad. 

Seventh,  Septimus, -a, -um  (num.  adj.). 

Seventy,   septuaginta    (indecl.   num. 


adj.). 
Several,   singuli,   -ae,  -a;    nonnulli, 

-ae,  -a,  plural  adjectives. 
Severity,  severitas,  severitatis  (f.). 
Shed^  vinea  -ae,  (f.). 
Shield,  sciitum,  -i  (n.). 
Ship,  navis,  navis  (f.). 
Short,  brevis,  brevis,  breve  (adj.). 
Show,  ostendo,  3,  ostendi,  ostentus, 

followed  by  indirect  discourse. 
Side,  pars,  partis  (f.) ;  on  that  — ,  ea 

parte;    on  this  — ,  cis  (prep,  with 

accusative) ;   on  the  other  — ■,  trans 

(prep,  with  accusative). 
Siege  engine,  opus,  Operis  (n.). 
Sight,  visus,  visiis  (m.). 
Signal,  signum,  -i  (n.). 
Since,  cum,  with  subjunctive. 
Situated,  positus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Six,  sex  (indecl.  num.  adj.). 
Six  hundred,  sescenti,  -ae,  -a  (num. 

adj.),  plural. 
Size,  magnitiido,  magnitudinis  (f.). 
Skillful,  peritus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Slavery,  servitus,  servitutis  (f.). 
Slay,  occido,  3,  occidi,  occisus. 
Slinger,  funditor,  funditoris  (m.). 
Slowly,  tarde  (adv.). 


Small,  parvus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

So,  ita  (adv.);  sic  (adv.),  tam;  — 
great,  tantus,  -a,  -um  (adj.);  — 
much,  ta.ntus, -a.,  -um  (adj.)  ;  —  that, 
ut  with  subjunctive. 

Soldier,  miles,  militis  (m.). 

Some,  nonnullus,  -a,  -um,  aliquis, 
aliqua,  aliquid  (adj.) ;  so/ne  trouble, 
quicquam  negoti ;  there  are  —  who, 
sunt  qui,  with  subjunctive  of  char- 
acteristic; —  ...  others,  d\H  .  .  . 
alii. 

Soon,  statim  (adv.);  mox  (adv.). 

Sort,  what  —  of,  see  what. 

Space  of  three  days,  triduum,  -i  (n.). 

Spare,  parco,  3,  peperci,  parsurus. 

Speak,  dic5,  3,  dixi,  dictus. 

Speech,  oratio,  orationis  (f.). 

Speed,  celeritas,  celeritatis  (f.). 

Speed,  at  full,  incitat5  cursu. 

Stand,  sto,  stare,  steti,  status; 
take  one^s  — ,  consists,  3,  constiti, 
(ad). 

Standard,  vexillum,  -i  (n.). 

State,  civitas,  civitatis  (f.);  matter 
in  a  critical  — ,  see  critical. 

Still,  tamen  (adv.) ;  —  braver,  f  ortior, 
-or,  -ius  (adj.). 

Storm,  take  by  storm,  see  take. 

Strength,  vis,  vis  (f.),  plural  vireS, 
virium. 

Strike  camp,  castra  moveo,  2,  movi, 
motus. 

Strong,  fortis,  fortis,  forte  (adj.). 

Struggle,  pugna,  -ae  (f.). 

Subdue,  vinco,  3,  vici,  victus. 

Such,  see  so  great ;  —  an  immense, 
see  immense. 

Sudden,  subitus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Suddenly,  subito  (adv.). 

Sue  for,  oro,  I. 

142 


A   FIRST   LATIN    WRITER 


Suessiones,  Suessiones,  -urn  (m.). 
Suevii  Suevi,  -orum  (m.). 
Suited,  idoneus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Summon,  arcesso,  3,  arcessivi,  arces- 

situs. 
Supplies,  copiae,  -arum  (f.),  plural 

noun. 
Supreme  power,  summa  (-ae    [f.]) 

imperi. 
Surprise,  to  take  sof7ieone  by  surprise, 

imprudenter  .  .  .  adgredior,     3, 

adgressus  sum. 
Surrender,  deditio,  deditionis  (f.). 
Surrender,  to,  ded5,  3,  dedidi,  dedi- 

tus  (refl.). 
Surrendered,  dediticius,  -a,  -um. 
Surround,  circumvenio,  4,  circum- 

veni,  circumventus. 
Swamp,  palus,  paludis  (f.). 
Swiftness,  celeritas,  celeritatis  (f.). 
Sword,  gladius,  -i  (m.). 


Take,  capio,  3,  cepi,  captus  ;  —  away, 
spolio,  I  ;  —  by  storm,  expugno,  i ; 
—  one's  stand,  consisto,  3,  constiti, 

;    —  possessio7t  of,  potior,  4, 

potitus  sum,  with  ablative. 

Taller,  grandior,  -or,  -us  (adj.). 

Teach,  doceo,  docui,  doctus. 

Tell,  dico,  3,  dixi,  dictus,  followed  by 
indirect  discourse;  narro,  i. 

Ten,  decem  (indecl.  num.  adj.). 

Tencteri,  Tencteri,  -orum  (m.). 

Tenth,  decimus,  -a,  -um  (num. 
adj.). 

Term,  condicio,  condicionis  (f.)  . 

Terrify,  perterreo,  2. 

Terrified,  perterritus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 

Territories,  fines,  -um  (m.),  plural 


Terror,  terror,  terroris  (m.). 

Than,  quam. 

That,  ille,  -a,  -ud,  is,  ea,  id  (dem. 
adj.  pron.) ;  but  — ,  quin,  with  sub- 
junctive ;  in  order  that,  ut ;  so  that, 
ut;  would — ,  utinam  (adv.). 

Their,  their  own  (with  reference  to 
the  subject),  suus,  -a,  -um;  other- 
wise, eorum,  ofthefn. 

Themselves,  ipsi,  ipsae,  ipsa  (pron. 
plural) ;  in  oblique  cases  when  re- 
ferring to  the  subject  sui,  sibi,  se,  se. 

Then,  tum  (adv.). 

There,  ibi  (adv.). 

Therefore,  ergo  (adv.);  itaque  (adv.). 

Thereupon,  inde  (adv.). 

They,  ei,  eae,  ea  (plural  dem.  pron.). 

Things  res,  rel  (f.);  easy  — ,  non 
quicquam  negoti ;  a  thing  which, 
id  quod. 

Think,  puts,  i. 

This,  hie,  haec,  hoc  (dem.  pron.). 

Though,  etsi,  with  construction  of 
protasis  ;  cum,  with  subjunctive ; 
quamquam,  with  indicative. 

Thousajtd,  mille,  singular  (indecl. 
num.  adj.) ;  milia,  milium  (n.), 
plural. 

Three,  tres,  tria  (num.  adj.);  space 
of  three  days,  see  space. 

Through,  per  (prep,  with  accusa- 
tive). 

Throw  back,  reicio,  3,  reieci,  reiectus. 

Throw  up,  build  up,  exstruo,  3, 
exstruxi,  exstructus. 

Thus,  sic,  ita  (adv.). 

Time,  tempus,  temporis  (n.) ;  one  at 
a  — ,  see  one  ;  for  a  long  — ,  diu ; 
long  —  ago,  antiquitus. 

Titurius,  Titurius,  -i  (m.). 

TOi  ad  (prep,  with  accusative). 

43 


A  FIRST  LATIN   WRITER 


Together  with,  una  cum  (prep,  with 
ablative);  bring  — ,  see  under 
brings  collect,  gather,  get,  crowded. 

Too  far,  paulo  longius  (adv.). 

Top  of,  summus,  -a,  -um  (adj.) 

Towards,  ad  (prep,  with  accusative). 

Toiver,  turris,  turris  (f.) . 

Town,  oppidum,  -i  (n.). 

Townsman,  oppidanus,  -i  (c). 

Train,  exercito,  i. 

Transport,  traduco,  3,  traduxi,  tra- 
ductus,  with  two  accusatives. 

Treachery,  proditio,  proditionis  (f.). 

Treveri,  Treveri,  -orum  (m.). 

Trial  of,  make,  periclitor,  i. 

Tribe,  gens,  gentis  (f.). 

Tributary  to,  w^-^^,  vectigales  habere. 

Trick,  insidiae,  -arum  (f.),  plural 
noun. 

Troops,  copiae,  -arum  (f.),  plural 
noun. 

Trouble,  some,  quicquam  negoti. 

Trumpet,  tuba,  -ae  (f.). 

Try,  Conor,  i,  takes  infinitive. 

Turn,  converto,  3,  convert!,  con- 
versus. 

Twenty,  viginti  (indecl.  num.  adj.). 

Two,  duo,  -ae,  -0  (num.  adj.). 

U 

Unable,  impotens,  impotentis  (adj.) ; 

be  — ,   non   possum,    non   posse, 

non    potui,    with    complementary 

infinitive. 
Uncertaiit,  incertus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Under  .  .  .  leadership,  translated  by 

ablative  absolute  .  .  .  duce. 
Unequaled,  singularis,  -is,  -e. 
Unexpected,    improvisus,     -a,    -um 

(adj.). 
Unfavorable,  iniquus, -a,  -um  (adj.). 

I 


Unless,  nisi  (conj.). 

Unprepared,  imparatus,  -a,  -um 
(adj.). 

Until,  dum;  donee;  quoad;  with 
subjunctive. 

Unwilling,  be,  nolo,  nolle,  nolui, 
with  infinitive,  or  ut,  with  sub- 
junctive. 

Unwillingly,  translate  by  invitus,  -a, 
-um,  in  agreement  with  the  subject. 

Up,  see  draw,  bring,  send. 

Upon,  against,  contra  (prep,  with 
accusative) ;  in  (prep,  with  accusa- 
tive) ;   come  — ,  see  come. 

Uproar,  strepitus,  -iis  (m.). 

Use,  iisus,  iisiis  (m.). 

Use,  to  77iake  —  of,  utor,  3,  usus  sum, 
with  ablative. 

Usipetes,  Usipetes,  -um  (m.). 

Usual  clei?iency,  courage,  etc.,  trans- 
late by  possessive  pronoun,  e.g.  his 
usual  clemency,  sua  dementia. 


Vain,  in,  frustra. 

Valor,  virtiis,  virtu tis  (f.). 

Van  of  the  baggage,  prima  impedi- 
menta (n.),  plural. 

Veneti,  Veneti,  -orum  (m.). 

Victor,  victor,  victoris  (m.). 

Victory,  victoria,  -ae  (f.). 

Vieiv,  prospectus,  -iis  (m.). 

Village,  vicus,  -i  (m.). 

Viromandui,  the,  Viromandui,  -orum 
(m.). 

W 

Wait  for,  exspecto,  i. 

Wall,  murus,  -i  (m.). 

Wander  about,  vagor,  i. 

Wa7tt,  ivish,  volo,  velle,  volui,  with 
infinitive,  or  ut,  with  subjunctive; 

44 


A   FIRST   LATIN   WRITER 


(^—be  in  need  of),  ege5,  2,  egui, 

with  genitive. 
War,  bellum,  -i(n.) ;  make — ,bellum 

infero,  inferre,  intuli,  inlatus,  with 

dative;  efigines  of — ,  see  engine. 
Waste,  see  lay  waste. 
Water,  aqua,  -ae  (f.). 
We,  nos,  nostrum  (c). 
Weakest^     infirmissimus,     -a,     -um 

(adj.). 
Weapon,  telum,  -i  (n.). 
What  sort  of  ?  quails,  -is,  -e?  (adj.). 
When,   ubi,   with    indicative;     cum, 

with  subjunctive  or  indicative. 
Where ^  ubi;   where?  qua? 
Whether?  utrum?  (adv.). 
While,  dum,  with  present  indicative. 
While,  for  a  little,  paulisper  (adv.). 
While,  for  a  long,   iamdiu   (adv. ) ; 

iamdudum  (adv.). 
Whither?  quo?  (adv.). 
Who,  which,  what,  qui,  quae,  quod 

(rel.  pron.). 
Who?  which?  what?   quis?    quae? 

quid?  or  quod?  (interrog.  pron.). 
Whole,  totus,  -a,  -um  (adj.). 
Why?  quid?  (adv.). 
Wife,  coniunx,  coniugis  (f.). 
Win,  vinco,  3,  vici,  victus. 
Wine,  Yinnm,  -i  (n.). 
Wing  of  an  army,  cornii,  cornii  (n.). 
Wipe  out,  deleo,  2,  delevi,  deletus. 
Wisely,  sapienter  (adv.). 


Wish,  to,  volo,  velle,  volui, ,  with 

infinitive,  or  ut,  with  subjunctive. 

With,  cum  (prep,  with  ablative); 
—  the  purpose  of,  see  purpose. 

Withdraiv,  recipio,  3,  recepi,  re- 
ceptus,  with  reflexive. 

Within,  intra  (prep,  with  accusa- 
tive); in  expressions  of  time  is 
expressed  by  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition. 

Without,  sine  (prep,  with  ablative). 

With  regard  to  them,  in  eos. 

Withstand,  sustineo,  2,  sustinui, 
sustentus ;  resistd,  3,  restiti,  with 
dative. 

Woman,  mulier,  mulieris  (f.). 

Woods,  silva,  -ae  (f.). 

Work,  zvork  on  the  fortifications^ 
Opus,  operis  (n.). 

World,  orbis  terrarum. 

Would  that !  vX\.\i3iVCi.\  (adv.). 

Wound,  vulnus,  vulneris  (n.). 


Year,  annus,  -i  (m.). 

Yet,  not,  nondum. 

Yield,  cedo,  3,  cessi,  cessiirus. 

You,  tu,  tui,  plural  vos,  vestrum  (c). 

Your,  referring  to  one  person,  tuus, 
-a,  -um,  to  more  than  one,  vester, 
vestra,  vestrum  (poss.  pron.). 

Yourselves  and  all  your  belongings, 
vos  vestraque  omnia. 


FIRST   LATIN    WRITER  —  lO 


145 


Lane's   Latin   Grammars 


LANE'S  LATIN  GRAMMAR $1.50 

For  Use  in  Schools  and  Colleges.  By  George  M.  Lane. 
Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Late  Professor  Emeritus  in  Harvard  University. 
In  many  respects  this  is  the  most  thorough,  philosophical,  and  com- 
plete Latin  Grammar  ever  published  in  this  country,  representing,  as  it 
does,  the  crowning  work  and  ripest  conclusions  of  one  of  the  most 
eminent  teachers  of  the  language.  The  work  has  the  distinction,  rarely 
accorded  to  a  text-book,  of  being  regarded  both  as  a  literary  and  as  a 
scientific  event.  Its  preparation  engaged  the  author,  during  the  intervals 
of  teaching  at  Harvard  University,  for  nearly  thirty  years.  After  his 
death  the  work  was  taken  up  and  completed  by  his  colleague,  Dr.  Morris 
H.  Morgan,  of  Harvard  University.  Some  of  the  distinguishing 
features  and  merits  of  the  book  are  comprehensiveness  and  accuracy  in 
detail,  precision  of  definition  and  statement,  combined  with  a  remark- 
ably clear  arrangement  and  singular  aptness  of  illustration.  The  sup- 
plementary aids  are  an  important  feature.  These  include  a  chapter  on 
Versification  written  by  Dr.  Herman  W.  Hayley,  a  former  pupil  of 
Professor  Lane,  and  brief  expositions  of  such  important  subjects  as 
Rules  of  Quantity  and  Figures  of  Prosody,  Occasional  Peculiarities  of 
Verbs,  Indirect  Discourse,  Use  of  Pronouns  and  Numerals.  The  book 
contains  also  a  complete  Index  of  Subjects  and  an  Index  of  Latin 
Words  with  references. 

LANE  AND  MORGAN'S  SCHOOL  LATIN  GRAMMAR       .        ,    $1.00 
Prepared  by  Morris  H.   Morgan,    Ph.D.,  LL.D.,    Professor  of 

Classical  Philology  in  Harvard  University. 

This  book  is  intended  for  the  use  of  students  of  Latin  during  their, 
course  in  secondary  schools.  It  is  based  on  *'  Lane's  Latin  Grammar 
for  Schools  and  Colleges,"  and  furnished  abundant  material  for  careful 
training  in  Latin  pronunciation,  for  the  study  of  leading  principles  under 
which  Latin  words  are  formed,  for  thorough  drill  in  inflections,  and  for 
acquiring  a  good  working  knowledge  of  the  most  important  principles  of 
Latin  syntax  and  composition.  The  arrangement  of  the  material  is  clear 
and  logical  with  cross-references  to  the  to  the  larger  grammar. 


Copies  sent^  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price^ 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  •  Cincinnati  ♦  Chicago 

(»38) 


Latin  Literature  of  the  Empire 

Selected  and  Edited  with  Revised  Texts  and  Brief  Introductions 

By  ALFRED   GUDEMAN,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor  of  Classical  Philology,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

In  Two  Volumes.     Cloth,  12mo.      Per  Volume.  $1.80 

Vol.  I — Prose.  Selections  from  Velleius,  Curtius,  Seneca  Rhetor, 
Justinus  (Trogus  Pompeius),  Seneca,  Petronius,  including  Cena 
Trimalchionis,  Pliny  the  Elder,  Quintilian,  Tacitus,  Pliny  the 
Younger,  Suetonius,  Minucius  Felix  Octavius,  Apuleius — Ammianus 
Marcellinus,  and  Boethius. 

Vol.  II — Poetry.  Pseudo  Vergiliana,  Aetna,  Manilius,  Calpurnius, 
Nemesianus,  Phaedrus,  Lucan,  Valerius  Flaccus,  Seneca,  the 
Octavia  (anonymous),  Persius,  Statins,  Silius  Italicus,  Martial, 
Juvenal,  Pervigilium  Veneris,  Ausonius,  and  Claudianus. 


The  works  of  Latin  Literature  of  the  post-Augustan 
period  have  hitherto,  with  a  few  notable  exceptions,  been 
virtually  excluded  from  the  classical  curricula  of  colleges 
and  universities. 

The  present  collection  has  been  made  primarily  for  the 
use  of  students  in  higher  classes  in  colleges.  The  selec- 
tions will  be  found  useful  as  collateral  reading  in  con- 
nection with  lectures  on  classical  literature,  and  will  also 
furnish  suitable  material  for  sight  reading. 

The  selections  themselves  contain  nothing  that  is  not 
eminently  worthy  of  perusal.  They  are  in  every  case 
sufficiently  extensive  to  give  a  continuous  and  coherent 
story,  which  at  the  same  time  exhibits  the  author  at  his 
best.  The  text  follows  the  best  modern  editions,  the 
deviations  from  the  standard  texts  being  briefly  recorded 
in  critical  appendices. 


Copies  sent,  prepaid^  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price, 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  ♦  Cincinnati  ♦  Chicago 


Latin  Dictionaries 


HARPER'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY 

Founded  on  the  translation  of  '*Freund's  Latin-German  Lexicon.** 
Edited  by  E.  A.  Andrews,  LL.D.  Revised,  Enlarged,  and  in  great 
part  Rewritten  by  Charlton  T.   Lewis,   Ph.D.,  and  Charles 
Short,  LL.D. 
Royal  Octavo,  2030  pages      .       Sheep,  $6.50;  Full  Russia,  $10.00 

The  translation  of  Dr.  Freund's  great  Latin-German  Lexicon, 
edited  by  the  late  Dr.  E.  A.  Andrews,  and  published  in  1850,  has  been 
from  that  time  in  extensive  and  satisfactory  use  throughout  England  and 
America.  Meanwhile  great  advances  have  been  made  in  the  science  on 
which  lexicography  depends.  The  present  work  embodies  the  latest 
advances  in  philological  study  and  research,  and  is  in  every  respect  the 
most  complete  and  satisfactory  Latin  Dictionary  published. 

LEWIS'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY  FOR  SCHOOLS 
By  Charlton  T.  Lewis,  Ph.D. 
Large  Octavo,  1200  pages      .      Cloth,  $4  50  ;  Half  Leather,  $5.00 

This  dictionary  is  not  an  abridgment,  but  an  entirely  new  and  inde- 
pendent work,  designed  to  include  all  of  the  student's  needs,  after 
acquiring  the  elements  of  grammar,  for  the  interpretation  of  the  Latin 
authors  commonly  read  in  school. 

LEWIS'S  ELEMENTARY  LATIN   DICTIONARY 
By  Charlton  T.  Lewis,  Ph.D. 
Crown  Octavo,  952  pages.     Half  Leather.         .         .         .       $2.00 

This  work  is  sufficiently  full  to  meet  the  needs  of  students  in 
secondary  or  preparatory  schools,  and  also  in  the  first  and  second  years* 
work  in  colleges. 

SMITH'S  ENGLISH-LATIN    DICTIONARY 

A   Complete  and  Critical  English-Latin  Dictionary.     By  William 
Smith,  LL.D.,  and  Theophilus  D.  Hall,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  Uni- 
versity College,  London.     With  a  Dictionary  of  Proper  Names. 
Royal  Octavo,  765  pages.     Sheep $4.00 


Copies  sent^  prepaid^  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price, 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  ♦  Cincinnati  ♦  Chicago 

(278) 


MORRIS  &■  MORGAN'S  LATIN  SERIES 

HORACE'S   ODES,  EPODES 
and  CARMEN  SAECULARE 

EDITED,    WITH    INTRODUCTION    AND    COMMENTARY, 

BY   CLIFFORD   HERSCHEL   MOORE, 

ASSISTANT    PROFESSOR   OF   LATIN   AND    GREEK,    HARVARD   UNIVERSITY. 

Cloth,  i2mo,  465  pp.     Price,  $1.50.  Text  edition.     Price,  40  cents. 


npHIS  edition  of  Horace's  lyrical  poems  has  been 
prepared  for  the  needs  of  freshmen  and  sopho- 
mores. The  introduction  is  intended  to  give  the 
necessary  information  as  to  the  poet's  life  and  writ- 
ings. The  text  is  the  vulgate,  although  in  some 
passages  the  better  manuscript  edition  has  been  pre- 
ferred. Inasmuch  as  young  students  require  no  little 
help  if  they  are  to  understand  as  well  as  translate  the 
Odes  and  Epodes,  the  editor  has  not  limited  his  com- 
mentary to  the  baldest  aids,  but  has  tried  to  give 
such  assistance  in  interpretation  as  may  help  students 
to  some  appreciation  of  Horace's  art  and  charm. 
The  relation  of  the  poet  to  his  Greek  models  is 
shown  by  frequent  quotations.  To  all  the  more 
difRcult  Greek  passages  translations  have  been  ap- 
pended. A  number  of  quotations  from  the  later 
Latin  writers  are  also  given  to  indicate  in  some 
degree  the  ready  acceptance  which  Horace's  phrases 
found  among  his  successors. 

For  list  of  the  entire  series  and  descriptive  catalogue  of  text-books 
in  the  Ancient  Languages,  write  to  the  Publishers, 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY 
NEW  YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO 

BOSTON    ATLANTA    DALLAS    SAN  FRANCISCO 

(271) 


Greek    Dictionaries 


LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S  GREEK-ENGLISH  LEXICON 

Revised  and  Enlarged.  Compiled  by  Henry  George  Liddell, 
D.D.,  and  Robert  Scott,  D.D.,  assisted  by  Henry  Drisler, 
LL.D.  Large  Quarto,  1794  pages.  Sheep  .  .  .  $10.00 
The  present  edition  of  this  great  work  has  been  thoroughly  revised, 

and  large  additions  made  to  it.     The  editors  have  been  favored  with  the 

co-operation  of  many  scholars  and  several  important  articles  have  been 

entirely  rewritten. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S  GREEK-ENGLISH    LEXICON—lntermedlate 

Revised  Edition.     Large  Octavo,  910  pages. 

Cloth,  $3.50;  Half  Leather,  $4.00 

This  Abridgment  is  an  entirely  new  work,  designed  to  meet  the 
ordinary  requirements  of  instructors.  It  differs  from  the  smaller 
abridged  edition  in  that  it  is  made  from  the  last  edition  of  the  large 
Lexicon,  and  contains  a  large  amount  of  new  matter. 

LIDDELL  AND  SCOTT'S  GREEK-ENGLISH  LEXICON— Abridged 

Revised  Edition.  Crown  Octavo,  832  pages.  Half  Leather  $1.25 
This  Abridgment  is  intended  chiefly  for  use  by  students  in  Secondary 

and  College  Preparatory  Schools. 

THAYER'S  GREEK-ENGLISH   LEXICON  OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT 
Being    Grimm's   Wilke's    Clavis    Novi   Testamenti.      Translated, 
Revised,  and  Enlarged  by  Joseph  Henry  Thayer,  D.D.,  LL.D. 
Royal  Quarto,  727  pages       .       Cloth,  $5.00 ;  Half  Leather,  $6.50 
This  great  work  embodies  and  represents  the  results  of  the  latest 
researches  in  modern  philology  and  biblical  exegesis.     It  traces  histori- 
cally the  signification  and  use  of  all  words  used  in  the  New  Testament, 
and  carefully  explains  the  difference  between  classical  and  sacred  usage. 

YONGE'S  ENGLISH.GREEK  LEXICON 

By  C.  D.  YoNGE.     Edited  by  Henry  Drisler,  LL.D. 

Royal  Octavo,  903  pages.     Sheep $4.50 

AUTENRIETH'S  HOMERIC  DICTIONARY 

Translated  and  Edited  by  Robert  P.  Keep,  Ph.D.     New  Edition. 

Revised  by  Isaac  Flagg,  Ph.D. 

i2mo,  312  pages.     Illustrated.     Cloth       .        ,        •        .       $1.10 


Copies  senty  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price, 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  ♦  Cincinnati  ^  Chicago 

(310) 


classical   Dictionaries 


HARPER'S    DICTIONARY    OF    CLASSICAL    LITERATURE    AND 

ANTIQUITIES 

Edited  by  H.  T.   Peck,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  the   Latin  Language 

and  Literature  in  Columbia  University. 

Royal  Octavo,  1716  pages.     Illustrated. 
One  Vol.     Cloth         .        \     $6.00      Two  Vols.     Cloth       .         .     $7.00 
One  Vol.     Half  Leather     .       8.00      Two  Vols.    Half  Leather    .     10.00 

An  encyclopaedia,  giving  the  student,  in  a  concise  and  intelligible 
form,  the  essential  facts  of  classical  antiquity.  It  also  indicates  the 
sources  whence  a  fuller  and  more  critical  knowledge  of  these  subjects 
can  best  be  obtained.  The  articles,  which  are  arranged  alphabetically, 
include  subjects  in  biography,  mythology,  geography,  history,  literature, 
antiquities,  language,  and  bibliography.  The  illustrations  are,  for  the 
most  part,  reproductions  of  ancient  objects.  The  editor  in  preparing 
the  book  has  received  the  co-operation  and  active  assistance  of  the  most 
eminent  American  and  foreign  scholars. 

SMITH'S  DICTIONARY  OF  GREEK  AND  ROMAN  ANTIQUITIES 

Edited     by    William    Smith,    Ph.D.        Revised    by    Charles 
Anthon,  LL.D.     Octavo,  II 33  pages.     Illustrated.     Sheep     $4.25 
Carefully  revised,  giving  the  results  of  the  latest  researches  in  the 
history,  philology,  and   antiquities   of   the   ancients.      In  the  work  of 
revision,  the  American  editor  has  had  the  assistance  of  the  most  dis- 
tinguished scholars  and  scientists. 

STUDENTS'  CLASSICAL  DICTIONARY 

A  Dictionary  of  Biography,  Mythology,  and  Geography.    Abridged. 

By  William  Smith,  D.C.L.,  LL.D. 

i2mo,  438  pages.     Cloth $1.25 

Designed  for  those  schools  and  students  who  are  excluded  from  the 
use  of  the  larger  Classical  Dictionary,  both  by  its  size  and  its  price.  All 
names  have  been  inserted  which  one  would  be  likely  to  meet  with  at  the 
beginning  of  classical  study. 


Copies  seniy  prepaid,  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  the  price, 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  ♦  Cincinnati  ♦  Chicago 

(3"> 


REVISED  EDITION 

VIRGIL'S    AENEID 

With  an  Introduction,  Notes,  and  Vocabulary  by  HENRY  S.  FRIEZE, 
late  Professor  of  Latin  in  the  University  of  Michigan.  Revised  by 
WALTER  DENNISON,  Professor  of  Latin  in  the  University  of 
Michigan. 

First  Six  Books .     .     ,     .     $1.30        Complete $1.50 

Complete  Text  Edition $0.50 

This  Work  differs  in  many  respects  from  the  former  edition.  Such 
changes  and  alteration*  have  been  introduced  as  are  necessary  to 
make  the  book  conform  to  modern  demands,  and  many  important  addi- 
tions have  also  been  made. 

The  Introduction  has  been  enlarged  by  the  addition  of  sections 
on  the  life  and  writings  of  Virgil,  the  plan  of  the  Aeneid,  the  meter, 
manuscripts,  editions,  and  helpful  books  of  reference. 

The  Text  has  been  corrected  to  conform  to  the  readings  that  have 
become  established,  and  the  spellings  are  in  accord  with  the  evidence  of 
inscriptions  of  the  first  century  A.D.  To  meet  the  need  of  early 
assistance  in  reading  the  verse  metrically,  the  long  vowels  in  the  first  two 
books  are  fully  indicated. 

The  Notes  have  been  thoroughly  revised  and  largely  added  to.  The 
old  grammar  references  are  corrected  and  new  ones  (to  Harkness's 
Complete,  Lane  &  Morgan's,  and  Bennett's  Grammars)  added.  The 
literary  appreciation  of  the  poet  is  increased  by  parallel  quotations 
from  English  literature.  The  irregularities  of  scansion  in  each  book 
are  also  given  with  sufficient  explanations. 

The  Vocabulary  has  been  made  as  simple  as  possible  and  includes 
only  those  words  occurring  in  the  Aeneid.  The  parts  of  compound 
words  are  not  indicated  separately  when  they  appear  unmodified  in 
the  compound  form.  The  principal  parts  of  verbs  are  given  which  are 
understood  to  be  in  actual  use. 

The  Illustrations  for  the  most  part  are  new  and  fresh,  and  have 
been  selected  with  great  care  with  a  view  to  assisting  directly  in  the 
interpretation  of  the  text.  There  are  also  maps  showing  the  wan- 
derings of  Aeneas,  the  vicinity  of  Cumae,  and  pre-historic  Rome, 
and  a  full-page,  facsimile  of  one  of  the  best  manuscripts  of  Virgil,  the 
Codex  Palatinus. 

American  Book  Company,  Publishers 

(256) 


Introduction  to   the   Study  of 
Latin    Inscriptions 

By  JAMES  C.  EGBERT,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 
Adjunct  Professor  of  Latin,  Columbia  University 

Half  Morocco,  large  12mo,  468  pages.     With  numerous  illustrations  and 
exact  reproductions  of  inscriptions     ....     Price,  $3  50 


This  work  is  designed  as  a  text-book  for  the  use  of 
students  in  Universities  and  Colleges,  and  also  to  furnish 
an  account  of  this  branch  of  archaeological  study  for 
general  readers.  It  has  been  prepared  in  the  belief  that 
a  knowledge  of  epigraphy  forms  an  essential  part  of  the 
equipment  of  a  teacher  of  the  classics,  and  that  the  sub- 
ject itself  has  become  so  important  as  to  justify  its  intro- 
duction, in  elementary  form  at  least,  into  the  curriculum 
of  undergraduate  studies. 

A  distinctive  feature  of  the  book  is  the  number  and 
character  of  its  illustrations, — there  being  over  seven 
hundred  cuts  and  diagrams  of  inscriptions,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  illustrating  the  text,  and  for  practice  in  reading. 
Of  these,  over  one  hundred  are  photographic  repro- 
ductions, showing  the  forms  of  the  letters  and  the 
arrangement  of  the  inscriptions.  The  work  is  also  sup- 
plied with  an  exhaustive  bibliography  and  valuable  tables 
of  abbreviations,  archaisms,  etc. 


Copies  of  Egbert's  Latin  Inscriptions  will  be  sent,  prepaid,  to  any  address 
on  receipt  of  the  price  by  the  Publishers  : 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  ♦  Cincinnati  ♦  Chicago 

(266) 


A  Grammar  of  Attic  and 
Ionic  Greek 

By  FRANK  COLE  BABBITT.  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 

Professor  of  the  Greek  Language  and  Literature,  Trinity  College,  Hartford ; 
formerly  Fellow  of  the  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  at  Athens. 

PRICE,  $1.50 

THIS  grammar  states  the  essential  facts  and  principles  of  the  Greek 
language  in  concise  form,  with  only  so  much  discussion  as  may 
reasonably  be  demanded  for  a  clear  understanding  of  the  subject. 
It  therefore  meets  the  wants  of  secondary  schools  and  at  the  same  time 
is  sufficient   for  all  ordinary  demands  of  the  college  course. 

A  Modern  Grammar. — The  book  incorporates  the  results  of 
the  more  recent  philological  studies,  and  includes  many  departures 
from  conventional  presentation.  Due  regard  is  paid  to  the  fact  that 
analogy  plays  an  important  part  in  language,  and  that  the  context  is 
often  more  important  than  grammatical  rules  in  determining  the  exact 
significance  of  mode  or  tense. 

Treatment  of  Cases.— The  treatment  of  cases  is  thoroughly  log- 
ical and  clear.  The  true  genitive  and  the  ablative  genitive  are  dis- 
tinguished from  each  other  and  considered  separately  ;  likewise  the 
true  dative,  the  locative  dative,  and  the  instrumental  dative.  In  this 
way  much  confusion  is  avoided. 

Rules  of  Agreement. — The  general  rules  of  agreement  are  first 
given  in  a  preliminary  paragraph  and  are  then  followed  by  a  general 
statement  regarding  attraction  and  constructio  ad  sensum,  and  its  appli- 
cation to  substantives,  adjectives,  verbs,  etc. 

Treatment  of  Modes. — The  general  significance  of  each  mode  is 
summarized  briefly  at  the  beginning,  with  its  uses  grouped  and  treated 
under  the  head  of  statements,  questions,  wishes,  commands,  etc.  The 
various  forms  of  statement  are  taken  up  and  contrasted,  thus  allowing 
the  student  to  perceive  at  a  glance  their  similarities  and  differences. 

Classes  of  Verbs. — While  every  portion  of  grammar  has  been 
simplified  as  much  as  possible,  the  notice  of  teachers  is  directed 
especially  to  the  fact  that  the  verbs  have  been  reduced  to  five  classes. 
In  spite  of  this,  however,  nothing  has  been  sacrificed  in  the  process. 

Indirect  Discourse. — The  subject  of  indirect  discourse  is  put  at 
the  end  of  syntax,  and  the  principles  have  been  fully  stated  in  their 
proper  places.  The  general  principles  are  clearly  enunciated,  followed 
by  the  details  with  numerous  examples. 

Syntactical  Usage. — Tables  of  syntactical  usage  for  reference  are 
included  to  make  it  possible  for  the  pupil  to  perceive  the  normal 
usage  at  a  glance. 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY,  Publishers. 


GREEK  SERIES  FOR  COLLEGES  AND  SCHOOLS 

Edited  under  the  supervision  of  Herbert  Weir  Smyth,  Ph.D., 
Eliot  Professor  of    Greek    Literature    in    Harvard    University. 

BRIEF   GREEK   SYNTAX 

By  LOUIS  BEVIER,  Jr.,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  the  Greek  Language  and  Literature  in  Rutgers  College. 
Cloth,  I2m0y  io8  pp.      Price,  go  cents, 

'T^his  book  contains  the  essentials  of  Greek  syntax 
"^  formulated  as  simply  and  clearly  as  possible, 
and  though  intended  principally  for  use  in  prepara- 
tory schools,  it  will  be  found  advantageous  by  fresh- 
men for  purposes  of  review.  Its  aim  is  to  counteract 
the  baleful  influences  resulting  from  the  too  wide  use 
of  sight  reading,  and  to  give  the  student  a  clear  and 
precise  grasp  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  Greek 
syntax.  In  this  way  it  is  hoped  that  he  will  be  able 
to  appreciate  more  fully  the  force  and  beauty  of  the 
Greek  language  and  the  precision  and  flexibility  oi 
the  author's  style  to  a  greater  degree  than  does  the 
average  freshman  of  to-day.  All  statements  of  prin- 
ciple are  illustrated  by  examples  quoted  in  their 
actual  form,  and  while,  for  obvious  reasons,  the  quota- 
tions are  drawn  chiefly  from  the  Anabasis,  a  few  have 
been  taken  from  Homer,  from  the  Cyropaedia  and 
other  writings  of  Xenophon,  and  from  prose  writers 
in  general.  It  need  scarcely  be  said  that  the  book  is 
not  intended  to  take  the  place  of  the  more  extensive 
grammars  already  in  use. 

For  illustrated  descriptive  catalogue  of  text-books  in 
the  Ancient  Languages^  write  to 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY 

NEW  YORK     CINCINNATI         CHICAGO 

(288) 


SYNTAX  OF 
CLASSICAL  GREEK 

FROM  HOMER    TO    DEMOSTHENES 
Part  I.      The  Syntax  of  the  Simple  Sentence,  $1.50 

BY 

BASIL   LANNEAU    GILDERSLEEVE 

WITH  THE  COOPERATION  OF 

CHARLES    WILLIAM    EMIL   MILLER 
OF  THE  Johns  Hopkins  University 


GILDERSLEEVE'S  Syntax  of  Classical  Greek  is  a 
Syntax  of  Style  from  one  point  of  view,  and  from 
another  an  Historical  Syntax  of  Greek  Literature. 
This  unique  feature  of  the  work  is  due  to  the  fact  that,  in 
the  first  place,  the  collection  of  examples  it  contains  is  in 
the  truest  sense  of  the  word  representative  of  all  the  various 
departments  of  the  literature,  and  in  the  second  place,  special 
attention  has  been  given  in  the  text  itself  to  historical 
evolution. 

In  the  presentation,  ease  of  consultation  has  everywhere 
been  aimed  at,  hence  only  a  single  topic  has  been  treated  in 
each  section,  and  examples  illustrating  different  categories 
have  not  been  mixed.  The  special  point  treated  in  each 
section  is  briefly  indicated  by  small  capitals.  Then  follows 
the  author's  statement  in  regard  to  the  particular  construc- 
tion involved.  The  standard  use  under  each  head  is  in  most 
cases  illustrated  by  a  translation.  Thereupon  follow  the  ex- 
amples, which  are  added  for  purposes  of  minuter  study. 

The  utmost  care  has  been  exercised  in  the  verification  of 
the  passages,  and  the  exact  text  has  been  studiously  main- 
tained. An  attempt  has  been  made  to  preserve  also  the 
exact  setting  of  the  passage,  as  it  were,  by  uniformly  mark- 
ing every  omission,  even  the  slightest;  while  everywhere 
the  critical  warrant  for  the  readings  given  has  been  kept  in 


AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 

[298] 


Lessons  in  Physical  Geography 

By  CHARLES  R.  DRYER,  M.A.,  F.G.S.A. 
Professor  of  Geography  in  the  Indiana  State  Normal  School 


Half  leather,  12mo.     Illustrated.     430  pages.      .       .       .       Price,  $1.20 


EASY  AS  WELL  AS  FULL  AND  ACCURATE 

One  of  the  chief  merits  of  this  text-book  is  that  it  is  simpler  than 
any  other  complete  and  accurate  treatise  on  the  subject  now  before  the 
public.  The  treatment,  although  specially  adapted  for  the  high  school 
course,  is  easily  within  the  comprehension  of  pupils  in  the  upper  grade 
of  the  grammar  school. 

TREATMENT  BY  TYPE  FORMS 

The  physical  features  of  the  earth  are  grouped  according  to  their 
causal  relations  and  their  functions.  The  characteristics  of  each  group 
are  presented  by  means  of  a  typical  example  which  is  described  in  unusual 
detail,  so  that  the  pupil  has  a  relatively  minute  knowledge  of  the  type  form. 

INDUCTIVE  GENERALIZATIONS 

Only  after  the  detailed  discussion  of  a  type  form  has  given  the  pupil 
a  clear  and  vivid  concept  of  that  form  are  explanations  and  general  prin- 
ciples introduced.  Generalizations  developed  thus  inductively  rest  upon 
an  adequate  foundation  in  the  mind  of  the  pupil,  and  hence  cannot 
appear  to  him  mere  formulae  of  words,  as  is  too  often  the  case. 

REALISTIC  EXERCISES 

Throughout  the  book  are  many  realistic  exercises  which  include  both 
field  and  laboratory  work.  In  the  field,  the  student  is  taught  to  observe 
those  physiographic  forces  which  may  be  acting,  even  on  a  small  scale, 
in  his  own  immediate  vicinity.  Appendices  (with  illustrations)  give  full 
instructions  as  to  laboratory  material  and  appliances  for  observation  and 
for  teaching. 

SPECIAL  ATTENTION  TO  SUBJECTS  OF  HUMAN   INTEREST 

While  due  prominence  is  given  to  recent  developments  in  the  study, 
this  does  not  exclude  any  link  in  the  chain  which  connects  the  face  of  the 
earth  with  man.  The  chapters  upon  life  contain  a  fuller  and  more 
adequate  treatment  of  the  controls  exerted  by  geographical  conditions 
upon  plants,  animals,  and  man  than  has  been  given  in  any  other  similar 
book. 

MAPS  AND  ILLUSTRATIONS 

The  book  is  profusely  illustrated  by  more  than  350  maps,  diagrams, 
and  reproductions  of  photographs,  but  illustrations  have  been  used  only 
where  they  afford  real  aid  in  the  elucidation  of  the  text. 


Copies  sent,  prepaid,  on  receipt  of  price » 

American   Book  Company 

New  York  ♦  Cincinnati  ♦  Chicago 


(112) 


THE    GOVERNMENT 

WHAT  IT  IS;   WHAT  IT  DOES 

By  SALTER   STORRS  CLARK 
Price,  75  cents 

THIS  text-book,  prepared  especially  for  use  in  high  schools,  covers 
the  whole  field  of  government.  It  furnishes  a  unique  presentation 
of  the  subject,  treating  of  the  principles  of  general  government 
before  considering  those  of  local  government. 

What  Government  Is.  The  first  part,  besides  giving  the  purpose 
and  plan  of  the  book,  tells  what  government  means,  who  compose  the 
government,  and  what  the  tools  of  government  are. 

What  Government  Does.  The  second  part  gives  a  simple 
treatise  on  the  functions  of  government  under  its  main  heads.  A 
chapter  is  added  on  what  government  does  not  do. 

Who  Does  It.  The  third  part  explains  the  American  system  of 
central  government,  and  local  government  by  the  people.  It  discusses 
voting;  state  constitutions;  the  United  States  Constitution;  the  relations 
of  nation,  state,  county,  township,  and  city  to  each  other;  with  a  sketch 
of  the  whole  world  in  its  relation  to  free  government. 

Government  Officials.  The  fourth  part  takes  up  the  principal 
officials  of  township,  county,  city,  state,  and  nation;  and,  besides  explain- 
ing their  many  duties,  gives  a  brief  statement  of  their  necessary 
qualifications  and  salaries. 

Government  in  Action.  The  fifth  part  describes  certain  practical 
operations  of  government;  and  includes  chapters  on  the  political  issues 
of  the  day  and  political  corruption. 

A  Little  Law.  The  sixth  part  contains  a  short  summary  of  the 
principles  of  international  law  and  of  business  and  property  law. 

The  Appendix.  At  the  end  of  the  book  is  a  list  of  the  chief 
nations  of  the  world,  arranged  under  their  different  forms  of  govern- 
ment; a  table  of  the  legislatures  of  these  countries,  showing  their  com- 
position; condensed  descriptions  of  the  methods  of  government  of  the 
most  important  countries;  a  table  showing  the  subjects  over  which 
Congress  and  the  state  legislatures  respectively  have  jurisdiction;  the. 
text  of  the  United  States  Constitution;  and  an  abstract  of  a  state 
constitution. 

Unusual  Features.  On  almost  every  phase  of  the  subject, 
comparison  is  made  between  the  United  States  and  the  rest  of  the  world, 
in  this  way  giving  an  outline  of  every  kind  of  government  and  of  the 
political  condition  of  the  entire  world.  The  subject  of  government  is 
presented  as  a  science,  a  complete  and  sensible  system  of  interdependent 
parts,  defined  limits,  and  a  single  object — the  good  of  the  people,  rather 
than  a  haphazard  record  of  powers  and  happenings.  The  book  also 
measures  and  emphasizes  the  comparative  importance  of  the  different 
governmental  functions.  Its  method  of  treatment  is  well  suited  to 
encourage  independent  thought  and  personal  research.  This  appears 
not  only  in  the  Supplementary  Work  at  the  end  of  each  chapter,  but  also 
in  the  problems  of  government  suggested  at  intervals.  Maps  and 
diagrams  are  used,  besides  suggestive  illustrations,  to  reenforce  the  text. 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY,  Publishers 

(■85) 


A  DESCRIPTIVE  CATALOGUE  OF  HIGH 
SCHOOL  AND  COLLEGE  TEXT-BOOKS 

A  yl  /E  issue  a  complete  descriptive  catalogue  of  our 
^  ^      text-books  for  secondary  schools  and  higher 
institutions,  illustrated  with  authors*  portraits. 

For  the  convenience  of  teachers,  separate  sections 
are  published,  devoted  to  the  newest  and  best  books 
in  the  following  branches  of  study: 

ENGLISH 

^  MATHEMATICS 

HISTORY  AND  POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

SCIENCE 

MODERN  LANGUAGES 

ANCIENT  LANGUAGES 

PHILOSOPHY  AND  EDUCATION 

If  you  are  interested  in  any  of  these  branches,  we 
shall  be  very  glad  to  send  you  on  request  the  cata- 
logue sections  which  you  may  wish  to  see.  Address 
the  nearest  office  of  the  Company. 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY 

Publishers  of  School  and  College  Text-Books 
NEW  YORK  CINCINNATI  CHICAGO 

Boston  Atlanta  Dallas  San  Francisco 

(312) 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 

AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL   BE  ASSESSED    FOR   FAILURE  TO   RETURN 
THIS    BOOK   ON   THE   DATE   DUE.    THE   PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY    AND     TO     $1.00     ON     THE    SEVENTH     DAY 
OVERDUE. 

SfP  15  I93fi 

JUN    15ib37 

^    •    t»an>.. 

8Jfi'C4SW 

REC'D  LD 

MAY  -^n'BA-FiPN 

LD  21-100m-8,'34 

YB  00505 


869060        ^^■'' 


V'  y 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


